Cooper
Cooper S
John Cooper
Works
Congratulations on your new MINI
This Owner’s Manual should be considered a permanent part of
this vehicle. It should stay with the vehicle when sold to provide
the next owner with important operating, safety and mainte-
nance information.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
© 2012 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/12, 07 12 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a particu-
lar topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 258.
4 Notes
7 Reporting safety defects
AT A GLANCE 9
10 Cockpit
16 Onboard computer
20 Letters and numbers
21 Voice activation system
CONTROLS 25
26 Opening and closing
48 Adjustments
54 Transporting children safely
58 Driving
67 Controls overview
78 Technology for driving comfort and safety
91 Lamps
96 Climate
101 Practical interior accessories
DRIVING TIPS 107
108 Things to remember when driving
NAVIGATION 117
118 Navigation system
120 Destination entry
129 Route guidance
137 What to do if…
ENTERTAINMENT 139
140 On/off and tone
143 Radio
150 CD player
152 External devices
COMMUNICATIONS 163
164 Hands-free device Bluetooth
173 Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
184 Office
192 MINI Connected
MOBILITY 195
196 Refueling
199 Wheels and tires
211 Engine compartment
215 Maintenance
217 Care
221 Replacing components
233 Giving and receiving assistance
REFERENCE 239
240 Technical data
250 Short commands for the voice activation
system
258 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
Using this Owner's
Manual
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you wish to sell your MINI at some time in
the future, remember to hand over this Owner's
Manual to the new owner; it is an important part
of the vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your MINI
dealer will be glad to advise you at any time.
You can find more information about the MINI,
for example on its technology, on the Internet at
www.MINI.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be
followed precisely in order to avoid the
possibility of personal injury and serious
damage to the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you in
gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rele-
vant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle equipment
The manufacturer of your MINI is the Bayerische
Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, BMW AG.
This Owner's Manual describes all models as well
as all production, country and special equip-
ment that is offered in the model range. Equip-
ment is also described that is not available
because of, for example, selected options or
country version. This also applies to safety
related functions and systems. For equipment
and models that are not described in this
Owner's Manual, please see the supplementary
Owner's Manuals that are provided.
Status of this Owner's
Manual at time of
printing
The high level of safety and quality of the MINI
vehicles is ensured through continuous develop-
ment. In rare cases, there may be differences
between the description and the vehicle.
For your safety
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires specially adapted mainte-
nance and repair methods. Therefore, have the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Notes
5
necessary work on your MINI only carried out by
a MINI dealer or a workshop that has specially
trained personnel working in accordance with
the specifications of the MINI manufacturer. If
this work is not carried out properly, there is a
danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by the manu-
facturer of the MINI.
When you purchase accessories tested
and approved by the manufacturer of the MINI
and Original MINI Parts, you simultaneously
acquire the assurance that they have been thor-
oughly tested by the manufacturer of the MINI
to ensure optimum performance when installed
on your vehicle.
The manufacturer of the MINI warrants these
parts to be free from defects in material and
workmanship.
The manufacturer of the MINI will not accept any
liability for damage resulting from installation of
parts and accessories not approved by the
manufacturer of the MINI.
The manufacturer of the MINI cannot test every
product made by other manufacturers to verify
if it can be used on a MINI safely and without risk
to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occu-
pants.
Original MINI Parts, MINI Accessories and other
products approved by the manufacturer of the
MINI, together with professional advice on using
these items, are available from all MINI dealers.
Installation and operation of accessories that
have not been approved by the manufacturer of
your MINI, such as alarms, radios, amplifiers,
radar detectors, wheels, suspension compo-
nents, brake dust shields, telephones, including
operation of any mobile phone from within the
vehicle without using an externally mounted
antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance,
CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or similar acces-
sories, may cause extensive damage to the vehi-
cle, compromise its safety, interfere with the
vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of
the MINI Limited Warranty. See your MINI dealer
for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and systems
may be performed by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using any certified
automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-
ductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your MINI is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Notes
6
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con-
ditions and registration requirements in your
country and continental region in order to
deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your
vehicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and registration requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable warranty
limitations or exclusions for such country or
region. In such a case, please contact Customer
Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain road
safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance mea-
sures:
> MINI Maintenance System
> Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
> Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov-
ered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Data memory
A variety of electronic components in your
vehicle include data storage devices, which
store technical information on the condition of
your vehicle, events and errors, either tempo-
rarily or permanently. In general, this technical
information documents the condition of a com-
ponent, a module, a system or the surroundings:
> Operating conditions of system compo-
nents, e.g., fill levels.
> Status messages regarding the vehicle and
of its individual components, such as wheel
rpm/vehicle speed, response delay, lateral
acceleration.
> Malfunctions and defects in the major
system components, such as the lights and
brakes.
> Responses of the vehicle in special driving
situations, such as the deployment of an
airbag, the utilization of stability control
systems.
> Environmental conditions, such as tempera-
ture.
These data are exclusively of a technical nature
and are used for the detection and correction of
errors, as well as the optimization of vehicle
functions. Motion profiles of traveled routes can
not be deduced from these data. If services are
required, such as repair services, service pro-
cesses, warranty claims and quality assurance,
then this technical information can be read out
by employees of service departments, including
the manufacturer, from the event and error data
storage devices by using special diagnostic
equipment. There, if necessary, you will receive
further information. After remedying an error,
the information in the error memory is deleted
or progressively overwritten.
When using the vehicle, situations are conceiv-
able in which this technical data, in conjunction
with other information, such as accident reports,
vehicle damage, witness statements, etc. - pos-
sibly with the assistance of an expert - could be
traced to particular individuals. Additional func-
tions that are agreed upon contractually with
the customer, such as vehicle tracking in case of
emergency, permit the transmission of certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Notes
7
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following applies only to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or MINI of North
America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safer-
car.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You
can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele-
phone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Watch Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATIONS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Around the steering wheel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
11
1 Adjusting the exterior mirrors, folding them
in and out 52
3 MINI Roadster, MINI Convertible: Always
Open Timer 69
7 Ignition lock 58
8 Buttons on steering wheel,
right
left side
9 Horn: the entire surface
10 Adjusting the steering wheel 53
11 Releasing the hood 212
2
Parking lamps 91
Low beams 91
Automatic headlamp control 91
Adaptive Light Control 92
Turn signals 63
High beams 93
Headlamp flasher 63
Roadside parking lamps 93
Computer 68
4 Tachometer 12
Instrument lighting 94
Resetting the trip odometer 67
5
Wiper system 63
6
Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 58
Resuming cruise control 65
Storing speed and accelerating or
decelerating
Activating/deactivating cruise
control 66
Increasing or reducing volume
Telephone:
Press: accepting and ending a call,
starting dialing of selected phone
number and redialing if no phone
number is selected
Microphone on steering column
Activating/deactivating voice
activation system 21
Microphone on steering column
Changing the radio station
Selecting a music track
Scrolling through the redial list
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
12
Displays
1 Tachometer 67
with indicator and warning lamps 13
2 Display for
> Current vehicle speed 67
> Indicator and warning lamps 13
3 Resetting the trip odometer 67
4 Display for
> Position of automatic transmission 60
> Computer 68
> Date of next scheduled service, and
remaining distance to be driven 71
> Odometer and trip odometer 67
> Initializing the Flat Tire Monitor 83
> Resetting the Tire Pressure Monitor 86
> Settings and information 70
> Personal Profile settings 26
5 Instrument lighting 94
6 Speedometer
with indicator and warning lamps 13
7 Control Display 17
8 Fuel gauge 67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
13
Indicator and warning
lamps
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in
various combinations and colors in indicator
area 1 or 2.
Some lamps will be tested for proper functioning
when the engine is started or the ignition is
switched on and will therefore light up briefly.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
You can call up more information, e.g. on the
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond,
via Check Control, page 74.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps in display area 1
indicate certain functions:
High beams/headlamp flasher 93
Front fog lamps 93
Rear fog lamp 94
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the drive
forces in order to maintain driving
stability 79
Parking brake applied 60
Engine malfunction with adverse effect
on exhaust emissions 216
Cruise control 65
Turn signals 63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
14
Around the center console
1 Hazard warning flashers
2 Speedometer with Control Display 12
3 Radio/CD
4 Air conditioner or automatic climate
control 96
Selecting waveband
Changing the audio source
Changing the radio station or track
Ejecting CD
Temperature
Recirculated-air mode
Air distribution for air conditioner
Air distribution to the windshield
Air distribution to the upper body
area
Air distribution to the footwell
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
15
5 Switches in the center console
6 USB audio interface 153
7 Buttons on the center console
8 Changing to a different menu on the Control
Display
9 MINI joystick 16
Move in four directions, turn or press
10 Accessing the main menu on the Control
Display 17
Around the headliner
1 Indicator/warning lamp for front passenger
airbags 89
2 Switch panel
Automatic air distribution and flow
rate
Maximum cooling
Cooling function
Defrosting windows
Rear window defroster
Windshield heating
Air flow rate
Seat heating 51
Power windows 36
MINI Convertible: central power
window unit 36
Rear fog lamp 93
Front fog lamps 93
Central locking system, inside 30
Sport button 81
Driving stability control systems
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 79
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 80
Reading lamps 94
MINI Roadster: interior lamps/
reading lamps 94
Color of ambient lighting 95
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster:
extending and retracting spoiler
manually 82
MINI Convertible, MINI Roadster:
opening and closing the sunroof or
convertible top 37
Interior lamps 94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE Onboard computer
16
Onboard computer
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
The concept
The onboard computer integrates the functions
of a large number of switches. This allows these
functions to be operated from a single central
position. The following section provides an
introduction to basic menu navigation. The
control of the individual functions is described in
connection with the relevant equipment.
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions permit; otherwise, you may
endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users by being distracted.<
Overview of operating
elements
Controls
1 Control Display
2 MINI joystick with buttons
Control Display
Notes
> When cleaning the Control Display, follow
the care instructions.
> Do not place any objects in the area of the
Control Display; otherwise, the Control
Display can be damaged.
Switching Control Display off/on
1. Move the MINI joystick to the right repeat-
edly until the "Options" menu is displayed.
2. "Switch off control display"
To switch on, press the MINI joystick.
MINI joystick with buttons
Selecting menu items and carrying out settings.
1. Turning 1 and pressing 2.
2. Tilting in four directions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Onboard computer AT A GLANCE
17
Buttons on MINI joystick
Operating principle
As of radio readiness, the following message
appears on the Control Display:
To hide the message:
Press the MINI joystick.
The main menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
All functions of the onboard computer can be
accessed via the main menu.
Selecting a menu item
Menu items displayed in white can be selected.
1. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired
menu item is highlighted.
2. Press the MINI joystick.
A new menu is displayed or the function is
executed.
Using the button on the MINI joystick:
Press the button.
Each time that the button is pressed, the menu
items "Navigation", "Radio", "CD/Multimedia"
and "Telephone" are called up, one after
another.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, the menu items that
should be selected are depicted in quotation
marks, e.g. "Settings".
Button Function
Accessing the main menu
Changing to another menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE Onboard computer
18
Changing between panels
After selecting a menu item, e.g. "Radio", a new
menu is displayed on a panel. The panels can
overlap.
> Move the MINI joystick to the left.
Current panel is closed and the previous
panel is displayed.
> Move the MINI joystick to the right.
The new panel is opened and placed on top.
Arrows pointing left or right indicate that addi-
tional panels can be accessed.
View of a menu that has been called up
In general, when a menu is called up, the panel
that was last selected in the menu is displayed.
To display the first panel of the menu:
Move the MINI joystick as often to the left as
necessary until the first panel is displayed.
Opening the Options menu
Move the MINI joystick to the right repeatedly
until the "Options" menu is displayed.
The following is displayed in the "Options"
menu:
> Screen settings.
> Control options for the selected menu.
Adjusting settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired
setting is displayed.
3. Press the MINI joystick to confirm the
setting.
Activating/deactivating functions
Some menu items are preceded by a check box.
It indicates whether the function is activated or
deactivated.
Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates
the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Example: setting the clock
1. Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the MINI joystick until "Settings" is
selected, and press the MINI joystick.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Onboard computer AT A GLANCE
19
3. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time/Date" is
selected, and press the MINI joystick.
4. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time:" is
selected, and press the MINI joystick.
5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and
press the MINI joystick.
6. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes and
press the MINI joystick.
Status information
1 Time
2 Telephone status
> Incoming, outgoing or missed call
> Roaming active
> Text message received
3 Reception strength of the wireless
network, depends on the mobile phone
4 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD, external devices
> Telephone:
Name of the mobile phone paired with
the vehicle
5 Sound output is switched off or
display for traffic bulletins:
> "TI":
Traffic bulletins are switched on.
> No display:
Traffic bulletins are switched off.
Other displays:
Status information is temporarily hidden during
Check Control message displays or entries via
the voice activation system.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE Letters and numbers
20
Letters and numbers
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Entering letters and
numbers
1. Turn the MINI joystick: select the letters or
numbers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm entry.
Switching between letters and numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering letters and numbers:
Switching between uppercase and
lowercase letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering uppercase letters and
lowercase letters:
Wordmatch concept
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
the entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
> The only letters offered for entry are those
for which data are available.
> Destination search: town/city names can be
entered with the spelling used in any of the
languages available on the Control Display.
Symbol Function
Press the MINI joystick:
delete one letter or
number
Press and hold the
MINI joystick: delete all
letters or numbers
Enter a blank space
Symbol Function
Entering letters
Entering numbers
Symbol Function
Move the MINI joystick
forward: to switch from
uppercase letters to lower-
case letters
Move the MINI joystick
forward: to switch from
lowercase letters to upper-
case letters
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
21
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
The concept
> By using the voice activation system,
individual functions that are displayed on
the Control Display can be operated via
voice commands. The system supports the
entry process by means of announcements.
> Functions that can only be used while the
vehicle is not moving cannot be operated via
the voice activation system.
> The system includes a special microphone in
the vicinity of the rearview mirror.
Prerequisite
So that voice commands can be identified, set
a language on the Control Display that is
supported by the voice activation system.
To set the language, see page 76.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Saying commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal indicate that the voice
activation system is ready to receive spoken
commands.
2. Say the command.
The command appears on the Control
Display.
This symbol is displayed on the Control
Display when you can enter additional
commands.
Terminating or canceling voice
activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by
the voice activation system.
{Cancel}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
22
Commands
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be voiced as commands.
The commands that are possible depend upon
which menu is currently shown on the Control
Display.
There are short commands for functions in the
main menu.
Some list items, for example telephone book
listings, can also be selected using the voice
activation system. In particular, say the list items
exactly as they are displayed in the respective
list.
Having the possible commands read
aloud
Having the possible commands read aloud:
For example if you have selected "CD" the
system will read aloud the possible commands
for operating the CD player.
Help for the voice activation system
Calling up Help:
Additional commands for Help:
> {Help with examples}: information about
the current operating options and the most
important commands for them are
announced.
> {Help with voice activation}: information
regarding the principles behind the voice
activation system is announced.
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run
a function, e.g.:
Carrying out functions through short
commands
Main menu functions can be executed imme-
diately by short commands, almost regardless
of which menu item is selected, e.g., {Vehicle
status}.
List of voice activation system short commands,
see page 250.
Opening the main menu
Example: selecting the track of a CD
1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if
necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the voice activation system
uses the standard dialog or the short version.
With the short version of the spoken dialog, the
requests and responses of the voice activation
system are shortened.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select a setting:
> "Default"
> "Short"
{Voice commands}
{Help}
{Radio} or {Radio on}
{Main menu}
3. Select the music track, e.g.:
{C D track …}
The system replies:
{{Track …}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
23
Notes
For voice commands, bear in mind the
following:
> Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an emergency call. In stressful situa-
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish-
ment of a telephone connection.
> Pronounce the commands and digits
smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding
excessive emphases and pauses. The same
applies to spelling when entering a destina-
tion for navigation.
> Always speak the commands in the
language of the voice activation system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
standard pronunciation of the station name.
{Select station} e.g. W-PLJ
> Keep the doors and windows closed to
prevent interference from outside noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Handle Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATIONS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
26
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Keys/remote controls
Buttons on the remote control
1 Opening the tailgate
2 Unlocking
3 Locking
General information
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is recharged when it is in the igni-
tion lock while the car is being driven. You
should therefore use each remote control at
least twice a year to maintain the charge status.
In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
page 35.
If more than one remote control unit is used, the
settings called up and implemented depend on
which remote control is recognized when the
car is unlocked, refer to Personal Profile,
page 26.
In addition, information about service require-
ments is stored in the remote control, refer to
Service data in the remote control, page 215.
New remote controls
Your MINI dealer can supply new remote
controls as additional units or as replacements
in the event of loss.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Driver's door, page 29
> MINI Convertible, MINI Roadster: glove
compartment, page 101
> MINI Convertible: locking the rear seat
backrest, page 112
> MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: opening for
loading, page 111
Personal Profile
The concept
The functions of your MINI can be set individu-
ally. By means of Personal Profiles, most of these
settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use. When you unlock the car, the
remote control is recognized and the settings
stored for it are called up and implemented.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
27
This means that your settings will be activated
for you, even if in the meantime your car was
used by someone else with another remote
control and the corresponding settings.
Individual settings are stored for a maximum of
three remote controls.
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, refer
to the specified pages.
> Response of the central locking system
when the car is being unlocked 27
> Automatic locking of the vehicle 30
> Triple turn signal activation 63
> Settings for the displays on the onboard
computer, in the speedometer and in the
tachometer:
> 12 h/24 h mode of the clock 73
> Date format 73
> Brightness of the Control Display 77
> Language on the Control Display 76
> Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances
and temperature 71
> Light settings:
> Pathway lighting 92
> Daytime running lights 92
> Automatic climate control: activating/
deactivating the AUTO program, setting the
temperature, air volume and air
distribution 98
> Entertainment:
> Tone control 141
> Adjusting volume levels 141
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system is ready for operation
whenever the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Tailgate
> Fuel filler flap
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Using the door lock
> In cars with Comfort Access, via the door
handles on the driver's and passenger's
sides
The anti-theft system is also operated at the
same time. It prevents the doors from being
unlocked using the lock buttons or door
handles. The remote control can also be used
to switch on/off the welcome lamps and interior
lamps. The alarm system is also activated or
deactivated, page 32.
Operating from inside
Button for central locking system, page 30.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
rior lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
from outside
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. Take
the key with you when you leave the vehicle so
that the vehicle can be opened from the out-
side.<
Using the remote control
Unlocking
Press the button.
The welcome lamps and interior lamps come on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
28
Unlocking mode
You can also set which parts of the car are
unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote
control in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button"
4. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock
the entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Press the button once to unlock
only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button.
The power windows open. In addition, the
sliding sunroof opens on the MINI Convertible.
To open the convertible top and rear windows
on the MINI Convertible: release button and
press again and keep pressed until the
convertible top is completely open. The side
windows remain open.
With Comfort Access: when you are close to the
vehicle, the windows are raised after the con-
vertible top opens on the MINI Convertible if you
continue pressing the button.
Convenient closing
MINI Convertible:
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote
control for Comfort Access can be used to close
the convertible top, the sliding sunroof and the
windows.
Press and hold the button.
The convertible top and the windows are closed.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Releasing the
button interrupts the closing process.<
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster:
Convenient closing using the remote
control is not possible.<
Locking
Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there is any person inside, because the
vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without
special knowledge.<
Setting confirmation signals
To have the vehicle confirm when it has been
locked or unlocked.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
29
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
4. Press the MINI joystick.
Switching on interior lamps
While the car is locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages, etc.
Unlocking the tailgate
Press the button for approx. 1 second
and then release it.
When it is opened, the tailgate swings out
and up toward the rear. Make sure that
adequate clearance is available before opening.
To prevent accidentally locking yourself out, do
not place the key down in the cargo area. If the
tailgate was locked before opening, it will be
locked again after it is closed.
Before and after each trip, check that the tail-
gate has not been inadvertently unlocked.<
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock
the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is
discharged. Use this remote control during an
extended drive; this will recharge the battery,
page 26.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Using the door lock
You can set which parts of the car are unlocked,
page 27.
Depending upon the equipment, it is possible
that only the driver's side door is unlocked or
locked using the door lock.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there is any person inside, because the
vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without
special knowledge.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
30
Locking doors and tailgate together
To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the
tailgate together:
1. With the doors closed, press the interior
central locking button, page 30, to lock the
vehicle.
2. Unlocking and opening the driver or passen-
ger door, page 30.
3. Locking the vehicle:
> Lock the driver's door with the integrated
key via the door lock, or
> press the safety lock button on the
passenger's door and close the door
from the outside.
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, the
driver's door can be unlocked or locked by
turning the integrated key in the door lock to
the end positions.
Opening and closing:
from inside
The switch locks or unlocks the doors and
tailgate when the doors are closed, but the anti-
theft system is not activated. The fuel filler flap
remains unlocked.
Unlocking and opening
> Either unlock the doors together using the
switch for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of either door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Press the switch or
> press down the safety lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. Take
the key with you when you leave the vehicle so
that the vehicle can be opened from the out-
side.<
Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the
car locks. The setting is stored for the remote
control in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select a menu item:
> "Lock if no door is opened"
The central locking system automatically
locks the vehicle after a short time if no
door has been opened.
> "Lock after start. to drive"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle as soon as you begin to drive.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
31
Tailgate
To avoid damage, make sure there is
sufficient clearance before opening the
tailgate.<
While driving, sharp objects or objects
with edges may strike against the rear
window and damage the heating element for
the rear window. Assure that there are no
objects with sharp edges near the rear
window.<
Opening
In some market-specific versions, the tail-
gate cannot be unlocked using the remote
control unless the vehicle is unlocked first.<
Press the button in the handle, arrow, or the
button of the remote control, for an
extended period. The tailgate is unlocked and
can be opened.
MINI Convertible
The maximum load that may be placed on
the open tailgate is 175 lbs/80 kg.<
Manual unlocking
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
also manually release the tailgate.
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster:
Pull on the handle. The tailgate is released.
MINI Convertible:
1. Use the integrated key and open the back-
rest lock 1.
2. Press button 2 and fold down backrest
together with the belt strap.
3. Pull the handle, refer to arrow. The tailgate is
released.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
32
MINI Convertible, MINI Roadster:
emergency unlocking
Pull on the handle in the luggage compartment.
The tailgate is unlocked.
Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the tail-
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may
occur.<
Take the remote control with you and do
not put it into the luggage compartment:
otherwise, the remote control can be locked in
the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.<
MINI Coupe
The handle recesses on the interior trim panel of
the tailgate make it easier to pull it down.
MINI Roadster
A handle recess on the interior trim panel of the
tailgate make it easier to pull it down.
Alarm system
The concept
The alarm system, when activated, reacts if:
> A door, the engine compartment lid or the
tailgate is opened
> There is movement inside the car
> The car’s inclination changes, for example if
an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the
wheels or to raise it prior to towing it away
> There is an interruption in the power supply
from the battery
The alarm system briefly indicates unauthorized
entry or tampering by means of:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on the hazard warning flashers
Arming and disarming
General information
Whenever the car is locked or unlocked, the
alarm system is armed or disarmed.
Door lock with armed alarm system
Because of the design, unlocking the door lock
may trigger the alarm in some countries.
To turn off the alarm, unlock the vehicle using
the remote control or switch on the ignition.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
33
Tailgate with armed alarm system
Even when the alarm system is armed, you can
open the tailgate by means of the button
on the remote control.
When you subsequently close the tailgate it is
again locked and monitored.
Panic mode
You can activate the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
Switching off the alarm:
Press any button.
Switching off an alarm
> Unlock the car with the remote control.
> Insert the key fully into the ignition lock.
> In cars with Comfort Access, press the button
on the door lock.
Display on the revolution counter
When the system is armed, all LEDs pulse. After
approx. 16 minutes one LED flashes.
> LEDs pulse or LED flashes: system is armed.
> One LED flashes at short intervals:
Doors, the hood or the tailgate are not
properly closed. Even if these are not closed
fully, the remaining items are deadlocked
and the LEDs pulse after approx. 10 seconds
for approx. 16 minutes. Afterwards, one LED
flashes.
The interior movement detector is not
activated.
> LEDs go out after the vehicle is unlocked:
No attempt was made to tamper with the
car.
> LEDs flash after unlocking until the key is
inserted in the ignition, but for no longer
than approx. 5 minutes: an attempt was
made to tamper with the vehicle.
Tilt alarm sensor
The vehicle's inclination is monitored. The alarm
is triggered, for instance, if an attempt is made
to steal the vehicle's wheels or tow it away.
Interior movement detector
Before the interior movement detector can
operate correctly, the windows and glass roof
must be closed.
MINI Convertible, MINI Roadster
The passenger compartment is monitored up to
the height of the seat's surface. This way, the
anti-theft alarm system including the interior
motion sensor are armed, even if the convertible
top is open. Falling objects, e.g. tree leaves, may
trigger a false alarm, refer to Avoiding false
alarms.
Avoiding false alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement
detector can be switched off together.
This prevents false alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In duplex garages
> When being transported on car-carrying
trains, ferries or trailers
> If pets are to remain inside the car
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior movement detector
> Press the button on the remote
control twice in succession.
> Lock the vehicle twice with the integrated
key.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
34
LEDs flash in short succession for approx.
2seconds.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement
detector are switched off until the car is next
unlocked and locked.
Comfort Access
The concept
Access to the vehicle is possible without the use
of the remote control. All you need to do is wear
the remote control close to your body, e.g. in
your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically
detects the remote control within the immedi-
ate vicinity or in the passenger compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func-
tions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Unlocking the tailgate separately
> Starting the engine
> MINI Convertible: Convenient closing and
soft-top control with the remote control for
Comfort Access
> MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: closing the side
windows
Functional requirements
> There are no external malfunction sources in
the vicinity.
> For locking, the remote control must be
outside of the vehicle.
> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
again until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started if the remote
control is in the vehicle.
> The doors and tailgate must be closed to
operate the windows.
Comparison to standard remote controls
The indicated function can be operated by
pressing the buttons or via Comfort Access.
Instructions on opening and closing are found
starting on page 26.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing the windows or cover, the system
is checking whether a remote control is inside
the vehicle. Repeat the opening or closing
procedure, if necessary.<
Unlocking
Press button 1.
Depending on the setting, refer to Unlocking
mode on page 28, only the driver's door or the
entire vehicle is unlocked.
Press the button again to lock the vehicle
again.<
Convenient opening with the remote control,
refer to page 28.
Locking
Press button 1.
MINI Convertible, MINI Roadster:
Window and convertible top operation
If a remote control is inside the vehicle, the
windows and convertible top can be opened
and closed after the radio is ready to operate.
Unlocking the tailgate separately
Press the button on the outside of the tailgate.
Corresponds to pressing the button.
If the vehicle detects that a remote control
has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle's cargo area after the tailgate is
closed, the tailgate will reopen slightly. The
hazard warning flashers flash and an acoustic
signal sounds.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
35
Windows, electric
If the engine is switched off, you can still operate
the windows so long as a door or the tailgate has
not been opened.
If the doors and tailgate are closed again and the
remote control is located inside the vehicle, the
windows can be operated again.
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock to
be able to operate the windows when the
engine is switched off and the doors are open.
Switching on radio readiness
Switch on radio readiness by pressing the Start/
Stop button, page 58.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch;
otherwise, the engine will start.<
Starting the engine
The engine can be started or the ignition can be
switched on when a remote control is inside the
vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote
control into the ignition lock, page 58.
Switching off the engine in cars with
automatic transmission
The engine can only be switched off when the
selector lever is in position P, page 60.
To switch the engine off when the selector lever
is in position N, the remote control must be in
the ignition lock.
Before driving a vehicle with automatic
transmission into a car wash
1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Move the selector lever to position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
The vehicle can roll.
Malfunction
Comfort Access may malfunction due to local
radio waves, e.g. due to the presence of a
mobile phone in the immediate vicinity of the
remote control or the charging of a mobile
phone in the vehicle.
If this happens, open or close the vehicle via
the buttons on the remote control or using the
integrated key.
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock
and start the engine.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp lights up when an
attempt is made to start the engine: the
engine cannot be started. The remote
control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunc-
tioning. Take the remote control with you inside
the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary,
insert another remote control into the ignition
lock.
The warning lamp lights up when the
engine is running: the remote control is
no longer inside the vehicle. After the
engine is switched off, the engine can only be
restarted within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp comes on and a
message appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote
control.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for Comfort Access contains
a battery that will need to be replaced from time
to time.
1. Remove the cover.
2. Insert the new battery with the plus side
facing up.
3. Press the cover on to close.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
36
Take the old battery to a recycling center
or to your MINI dealer.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the windows.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car; otherwise, children could operate
the electric windows and possibly injure them-
selves.<
If, after a window is opened and closed
several times in close succession, the win-
dow can only be closed and not opened, the sys-
tem is overheated. Let the system cool for sev-
eral minutes with the ignition switched on or the
engine running.<
Opening
> Press the switch downward.
The window opens until you release the
switch.
> Push the switch downward.
As of radio readiness, the windows will open
automatically. Push the switch again to stop
the opening movement.
To open the window a crack, press the switch
down twice in quick succession.
Closing
In order to close the window, press the switch
up. The window closes until you release the
switch.
Initializing electric power windows
If the battery was disconnected, e.g. for
changing batteries or vehicle storage,
reinitialize the power windows; otherwise, the
windows will not be lowered.<
1. Close the doors.
2. Open both windows.
3. Close both windows.
In the event of a system malfunction, please
contact your MINI dealer.
MINI Convertible: central power window
unit
> Press the switch downward.
First the rear windows, then the front
windows open until the switch is released.
> Push the switch downward.
With ignition turned on: rear and front
window open automatically.
Push the switch again to stop the opening
movement.
To close the window, push the switch upward
and hold.
Do not close the windows until the closing
procedure for the convertible top is
finished. Otherwise, it is not ensured that the
side windows will close properly against the
rubber seals of the convertible top. Convertible
top, refer to page 38.<
After switching off the ignition
When the ignition is switched off, the windows
can still be operated for approx. 1 minute as
long as no door is opened.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
37
Take the key with you when you leave the
car; otherwise, children could operate the
electric windows and possibly injure them-
selves.<
MINI Convertible:
convertible top with
integrated sliding
sunroof
To conserve battery power, if possible
operate the convertible top only while the
engine is running.
Prior to closing the convertible top, check for
and remove all debris from the windshield
frame; otherwise, the closing of the top may be
hampered.<
Opening and closing the sliding sunroof
To open:
Press the switch backward until the desired
position or the end position is reached.
To close:
Press the switch forward.
The sliding sunroof can be operated up to a road
speed of 74 mph / 120 km/h.
Power convertible top
The fully automatic convertible top provides
protection from the weather, combined with
simple and easy operation.
Here are some helpful tips for getting the most
enjoyment out of your MINI Convertible:
> It is recommended that you close the con-
vertible top whenever the vehicle is parked.
The closed convertible top not only protects
the vehicle interior from damage due to
unforeseen bad weather, but also provides a
certain degree of protection against theft.
Always keep your valuables inside the
locked luggage compartment, even if the
convertible top is closed.
> Do not mount any roof rack systems on the
convertible top.
> When opening the wet convertible top, e.g.,
after driving in the rain, water drops may
enter the luggage compartment. In order to
avoid water stains or soiling, remove all
objects from the luggage compartment, if
necessary.
If the temperature drops below +10 7/
–12 6, do not operate the convertible
top; otherwise, damage may occur.
Do not leave a wet convertible top open for
more than one day, since the humidity may
cause damages.
Do not place any objects on the convertible top,
as they could otherwise fall off while the con-
vertible top is being operated and result in
property damage or personal injury.
If the rollover protective system is extended, do
not operate the convertible top.
Always completely finish the operation of the
convertible top. Driving off before an opening or
closing procedure is completely finished can
lead to property damage or personal injury.
During the opening and closing operation,
ensure that no one is injured by the convertible
top linkage or other moving parts. Keep children
away from the pivoting range of the convertible
top.
For safety reasons, only operate the convertible
top while the vehicle is standing.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
38
While opening and closing, the convertible
top pivots upward. If operating the
convertible top inside a garage or under a
bridge, or similar low structure, ensure the
minimum clearance is 6.5 ft/2 m; otherwise,
the vehicle may be damaged.<
Before opening and closing
> Please observe the previous safety instruc-
tions.
> Please ensure the luggage compartment
roller cover is in its lowest position, refer to
page 111; otherwise, the convertible top
cannot be opened.
> Ensure the cargo does not push against the
luggage compartment roller cover from
below.
> Make sure that the tailgate is closed.
Opening and closing the convertible top
To open:
Press the switch backward in order to open the
sliding/tilting sunroof. Pressing the switch again
opens the convertible top.
To close:
Press the switch forward
Operating while driving
The convertible top may be opened or closed
while driving not faster than 20 mph/30 km/h.
While operating the convertible top, pay
close attention to the surrounding traffic;
otherwise, an accident may happen. Try to avoid
operating the convertible top while reversing
the vehicle since the rear view is very limited
during the convertible top's movement. Do not
operate the convertible top when driving on
winding and rough roads or during windy condi-
tions.<
For better control
> The LED lights up during convertible top
operation until the opening or closing
procedure is completely finished.
> The LED flashes after releasing the switch.
The opening or closing procedure has not
yet been completed. The procedure can
be continued in the desired direction by
pressing the appropriate switch.
> The "Convertible top not locked" indicator
lamp lights up and a message appears on
the Control Display.
Interruption
A convertible top which is not completely
open or closed is hazardous.<
The automatic movement is immediately inter-
rupted when the switch for the convertible top
operation is released. The procedure can be
continued in the desired direction by pressing
the appropriate switch.
If the opening or closing procedure is inter-
rupted by releasing the respective switch, the
convertible top stays in its current position for
several seconds before it slowly moves into a
more stable position. The procedure can be
continued by pressing the appropriate switch.
The opening and closing procedure is also inter-
rupted in case of a mechanical blockage. In this
case, in order to operate the convertible top
again:
1. Switch off the ignition and then switch it on
again.
2. Press the switch to continue the procedure
in the desired direction.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
39
Opening and closing procedure
Do not interrupt and restart the closing
procedure several times one after
another, or the convertible top mechanism
could be damaged.<
If the convertible top can be moved in only
one direction after several consecutive
attempts to operate it, the convertible top
system has overheated. Allow the system to cool
down for approx. 4 minutes.<
If the battery was disconnected, e.g. for
changing batteries or vehicle storage,
reinitialize the power windows, refer to page 36.
Otherwise, the windows cannot be lowered or
the convertible top cannot be opened.<
Convenience operation
For convenience operation using the remote
control, refer to page 27; for operation via the
door lock, refer to page 29.
Manual closing in the event of an
electrical malfunction
Only close the convertible top manually if
it is absolutely necessary. Never open it
manually. Improper handling of the convertible
top can result in damage. The closing procedure
must be completely finished. Otherwise,
damage or injury could result.<
Before closing
1. Remove Allen key and screwdriver from
vehicle tools, refer to page 221.
2. Pry out luggage compartment lamp from
the left side trim using the screwdriver.
3. Use the screwdriver and turn the gold-
colored screw, refer to arrow, one and a half
turns in the direction of the arrow.
Releasing the convertible top
1. Loosen bolt, arrow, with the Allen wrench
and remove.
2. Slide cover in travel direction, arrow 1, and
rotate out sideways, arrow 2. If necessary,
press plastic trim, arrow 3 slightly inward.
3. Pull out the sensor from cover, arrow, and
place on the inner side panel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
40
4. Using the Allen wrench, loosen second bolt,
arrow, to unlock the convertible top.
5. Remove bolt.
6. Slightly lift side frame, arrow 1, and pull the
sensor with the cable forward out of the
guide.
7. Swing cable out sideways, arrow 2.
When putting aside, ensure that the cable is
not clamped.
8. Release the second side frame.
Closing the convertible top
1. Place both hands on the convertible top on
the respective side frame.
2. Lift out both sides at the same time, and
swing the convertible top forward onto the
cowl.
3. Inside the vehicle, use a screwdriver to pry
out the cover in the center of the roof.
Closing the sliding sunroof
1. Insert the hexagon wrench into the recess in
the center of the roof and push upward,
refer to arrow 1.
2. Turn the hexagon wrench in the direction of
arrow 2.
3. Open both locking mechanisms and remove
the locking pieces.
Ensure that the locking pieces do not
fall on the vehicle; otherwise it could
be damaged.<
4. Insert the pins into the respective recess in
the cowl, refer to arrow.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
41
Locking the convertible top
Turn hexagon wrench in the opposite direction
of arrow 2 until the convertible top is securely
locked.
Please contact your MINI dealer to have
the electrical malfunction repaired.<
MINI Convertible: wind
deflector
With the convertible top open, the wind deflec-
tor keeps air movement in the passenger com-
partment to a minimum, thus providing you with
a more pleasant drive, even at higher speeds.
Do not let the wind deflector come into
contact with pointy objects as these may
damage the net. Do not place objects on the
installed wind deflector. When stowing the wind
deflector, ensure that it is not damaged by
objects.<
Before installing
1. Take the wind deflector out of the pouch.
2. Unfold the wind deflector, refer to arrows 1.
3. Press the locking device together until it
engages, refer to arrow 2.
Installing and folding up
1. Push out retaining pin 2 on one side until it
engages.
2. Insert wind deflector with retaining pins into
the openings 1 and 2 on that side of the
vehicle.
3. On the opposite side of the vehicle, insert
the retaining pin 1 into the opening,
pushing against the spring load.
4. Push out retaining pin 2 on one side until it
engages.
5. Fold up the upper part of the wind deflector.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
42
If a seat is in its rearmost position, do not
recline the backrest too far; otherwise, the
wind deflector could be damaged.<
Removing and folding
Remove the deflector following the reverse
sequence.
Push the release lever toward the center of the
wind deflector and fold both halves together.
MINI Roadster: manual
convertible top
General information
The fully automatic convertible top provides
protection from the weather, combined with
simple and easy operation.
Here are some helpful tips for getting the most
enjoyment out of your MINI Roadster:
> It is recommended that you close the con-
vertible top whenever the vehicle is parked.
The closed convertible top not only protects
the vehicle interior from damage due to
unforeseen bad weather, but also provides a
certain degree of protection against theft.
Always keep your valuables inside the
locked luggage compartment, even if the
convertible top is closed.
> Do not mount any roof rack systems on the
convertible top.
Do not leave a wet convertible top open
for more than one day, since the humidity
may cause damages.
Do not place any objects on the convertible top,
as they could otherwise fall off while the con-
vertible top is being operated and result in
property damage or personal injury.
Always completely finish the operation of the
convertible top. Driving off before an opening or
closing procedure is completely finished can
lead to property damage or personal injury.
During the opening and closing operation,
ensure that no one is injured by the convertible
top linkage or other moving parts. Keep children
away from the pivoting range of the convertible
top.
Only open or close the convertible top when the
vehicle is stopped.<
While opening and closing, the convertible
top pivots upward. If operating the con-
vertible top inside a garage or under a bridge,
or similar low structure, ensure the minimum
clearance is 6.5 ft/2 m; otherwise, the vehicle
may be damaged.<
Opening
1. Fold the handle out and rotate until it
reaches the end stop, arrow.
2. Using the handle, push the unlocked con-
vertible top upwards and open about six
inches.
3. Get out of the vehicle.
4. Guide the convertible top toward the rear.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
43
5. Push the convertible top downward with a
slight momentum until it audibly engages.
Closing
1. Switch on the ignition so that the windows
can be automatically lowered slightly.
Remove the wind deflector if necessary.
2. Press button 1.
The convertible top is unlocked and moves
slightly upward.
3. Get out of the vehicle.
4. Guide the convertible top forward.
5. Pull convertible top onto the windshield
frame
6. Turn handle clockwise until there is an
audible click.
The convertible top is locked.
If the convertible top has been open
for a longer time, a greater force for
locking may be necessary.<
7. Fold the handle back in.
MINI Roadster: semi-
automatic convertible
top
General information
The fully automatic convertible top provides
protection from the weather, combined with
simple and easy operation.
Here are some helpful tips for getting the most
enjoyment out of your MINI Roadster:
> It is recommended that you close the con-
vertible top whenever the vehicle is parked.
The closed convertible top not only protects
the vehicle interior from damage due to
unforeseen bad weather, but also provides a
certain degree of protection against theft.
Always keep your valuables inside the
locked luggage compartment, even if the
convertible top is closed.
> If the temperature drops below +14 7/
–10 6, do not operate the convertible top;
otherwise, damage may occur.
> Do not mount any roof rack systems on the
convertible top.
For reasons of safety, operate the
convertible top only while the vehicle is
not moving, if possible.
During the opening and closing operation,
ensure that no one is injured by the convertible
top linkage or other moving parts. Keep children
away from the pivoting range of the convertible
top.
Do not place any objects on the convertible top,
as they could otherwise fall off while the con-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
44
vertible top is being operated and result in
property damage or personal injury.
Always completely finish the operation of the
convertible top. Driving off before an opening or
closing procedure is completely finished can
lead to property damage or personal injury.
Do not leave a wet convertible top open for
more than one day, since the humidity may
cause damages.<
While opening and closing, the convertible
top pivots upward. If operating the con-
vertible top inside a garage or under a bridge,
or similar low structure, ensure the minimum
clearance is 6.5 ft/2 m; otherwise, the vehicle
may be damaged.<
Operating while driving
The convertible top may be opened or closed
while driving not faster than 20 mph/30 km/h.
Only operate the convertible top when
traffic conditions permit and vehicle con-
trol is not affected; otherwise, an accident may
occur.
Do not operate the convertible top when the
vehicle is moving in reverse, because rear
visibility is severely restricted while the conver-
tible top is opening or closing. Do not operate
the convertible top when driving on winding and
rough roads or during windy conditions.<
For better control
Indicator lamp lights up. Convertible top
has stopped moving. Convertible top is
fully open.
Indicator lamp lights up. Convertible top
has stopped moving. Close convertible
top using the handle.
Malfunction
The "Convertible top not locked" indicator lamp
lights up and a message appears on the Control
Display.
Interruption
A convertible top which is not completely
open or closed is hazardous.<
The automatic movement is immediately inter-
rupted when the switch for the convertible top
operation is released. The procedure can be
continued in the desired direction by pressing
the appropriate switch.
If the opening or closing operation is interrupted
by releasing the switch, the convertible top
remains in the current position. The procedure
can be continued by pressing the appropriate
switch.
The opening and closing procedure is also inter-
rupted in case of a mechanical blockage. In this
case, in order to operate the convertible top
again:
1. Switch off the ignition and then switch it on
again.
2. Press the switch to continue the procedure
in the desired direction.
Opening and closing the convertible top
Switching on radio readiness or ignition, see
page 58.
To spare the battery, operate the
convertible top only when the engine is
running, if possible.
Before closing the convertible top, remove any
foreign objects from the windshield frame that
may interfere with the closing of the convertible
top.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
45
Opening
1. Fold the handle out and rotate until it
reaches the end stop, arrow.
2. Using the handle, push the unlocked con-
vertible top upwards and open about six
inches.
3. Push switch back to open the convertible
top. The windows open during this proce-
dure.
Closing
1. Press the switch forward.
2. Pull convertible top onto the windshield
frame
3. Turn handle clockwise until there is an
audible click.
The convertible top is locked.
If the convertible top has been open
for a longer time, a greater force for
locking may be necessary.<
4. Fold the handle back in.
5. If necessary, close windows.
Manual closing in the event of an
electrical malfunction
Only close the convertible top manually if
it is absolutely necessary. Never open it
manually. Improper handling of the convertible
top can result in damage. The closing procedure
must be completely finished. Otherwise, dam-
age or injury could result.<
Before closing
Move the side windows slightly down, stop the
engine and switch off the ignition.
1. Remove the cover plate, see page 111.
2. Remove luggage area tray, arrow.
3. Using the Allen wrench from the tool kit,
turn the gold-colored screw, see arrow, in
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
46
the direction of the arrow by about four or
five rotations all the way to the stop.
Closing
1. Grasp the convertible top by the convertible
top frame and guide to the windshield
frame.
2. Unfold the handle and rotate counter-
clockwise all the way to the stop.
3. Pull convertible top onto the windshield
frame
4. Turn handle clockwise until there is an
audible click.
The convertible top is locked.
MINI Roadster: wind
deflector
With the convertible top open, the wind deflec-
tor keeps air movement in the passenger com-
partment to a minimum, thus providing you with
a pleasant drive, even at higher speeds.
Do not let the wind deflector come into
contact with pointy objects as these may
damage the net.<
Before installing
1. Take the wind deflector out of the storage
pouch.
2. Fold the wind deflector open, arrow.
Installing
1. With the parts 1 pointing rearward, insert
the wind deflector into the recesses 2 in the
rollover bar.
2. Slide the wind deflector downward until it
engages, arrow 3.
The wind deflector must engage firmly;
otherwise it can come loose at high
speeds.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
47
Removing
Remove the deflector following the reverse
sequence. Pull the wind deflector upward out of
the recesses.
Storage
Fold the wind deflector 1 closed and slide it into
the storage pouch 2.
The wind deflector can be stored in the rear
storage area behind the seats, refer to
page 103.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Adjustments
48
Adjustments
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital contri-
bution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con-
junction with the safety belts, the head restraints
and the airbags, the seated position has a major
influence on your safety in the event of an
accident. To ensure that the safety systems
operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly
urge you to observe the instructions contained
in the following section.
For additional information on transporting
children safely, refer to page 54.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms
in the event of the airbag being deployed.
No one and nothing should come between the
airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Ensure
that the front passenger is correctly seated, e.g.
that no feet or legs are propped against the
dashboard. Otherwise, leg injury could result if
the front airbag suddenly deployed.
Make sure that passengers keep their heads
away from the side/head airbag; otherwise inju-
ries can occur when airbags are deployed. <
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries
resulting from contact with airbags cannot be
fully excluded, depending on the circumstances.
The ignition and inflation noise may provoke
a mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive indi-
viduals. This effect is usually only temporary.
For airbag locations as well as additional infor-
mation, refer to page 88.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level.
Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury
in the event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 50.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Number of safety belts
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap.
Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low
across the hips and does not press against the
abdomen. The safety belt must not rest against
the throat, run across sharp edges, pass over
hard or fragile objects or be pinched. Fasten the
safety belt so that it is pulled taut across the lap
and shoulder, fitting the body snugly without
any twists. Otherwise, the belt could slide over
the hips in the event of a frontal collision and
injure the abdomen. Avoid wearing bulky
clothing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-
body area taut; otherwise, its restraining effect
could be impaired.<
Safety belts, refer to page 51.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Adjustments CONTROLS
49
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not
incline the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven; otherwise, there is a
danger in the event of an accident of sliding
under the safety belt, eliminating the protection
normally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 50 and on damaged safety belts
on page 52.
Seat adjustment
Observe the instructions on page 49 to
ensure the best possible personal protec-
tion.<
Longitudinal adjustment
Pull the lever, arrow 1, and slide the seat into the
desired position, arrows 2.
After releasing the lever, move the seat slightly
forward or back so that it engages properly.
Height
Pull up or push down the lever repeatedly,
arrows 1, until the desired height is reached,
arrows 2.
Backrest
Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weight to
the backrest or lift it off, as necessary, arrows 2.
Lumbar support
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Adjustments
50
Turn the wheel to increase or decrease the
curvature.
MINI Convertible: getting in back
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: access to lateral
storage tray
1. Pull up the lever on the seat backrest,
arrow 1.
The backrest folds forward.
2. Move the seat forward by pushing on the
backrest, arrow 2.
Return seat to original position
The driver's seat has a mechanical memory
function for the forward/back setting and the
backrest adjustment.
1. Slide the seat to return to its starting posi-
tion.
Do not fold the backrest up until the
seat is in its previous position. Other-
wise, the seat will engage in its current
position. In this case, adjust the longitudinal
position manually, page 49.<
2. Fold the backrest back up to lock the seat.
When moving the seat backward, ensure
that you do not cause personal injury or
property damage.
Before driving off, engage the front seats and
seat backrests. Otherwise, there is a risk of
accident due to unexpected movement.<
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury in an accident.<
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Height adjustment
To raise: pull up.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide
the head restraint down.
Removing
Only remove a head restraint if no one will be
sitting on the seat in question.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Adjustments CONTROLS
51
Reinstall the head restraint before trans-
porting passengers, as otherwise the head
restraint cannot provide its protective func-
tion.<
Front
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Fold the backrest forward slightly.
3. Press button 1 and pull the head restraint
out as far as it will go.
4. Fold back the backrest.
MINI Convertible: rear
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press button 1 and pull the head restraint
out completely.
Seat heating
Switching on
Press once for each temperature level.
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
If you continue driving within the next
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically
activated at the previously set temperature.
The temperature is lowered or the heating is
switched off entirely to reduce the drain on the
battery.
The LEDs stay lit.
Switching off
Press button longer.
Safety belts
Observe the instructions on page 49 to
ensure the best possible personal protec-
tion.<
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Front and rear seats
Closing
Make sure you hear the lock engage in the belt
buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of
any stature as long as the seat is adjusted
properly, page 49.
Opening
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Adjustments
52
MINI Convertible: rear belt guide
Please ensure that the belt guide loop,
arrow, is locked when putting on the rear
safety belts.<
Safety Belt Reminder
Front seats
The indicator lamps come on and an
acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a
message appears on the Control
Display. Check whether the safety belt
has been fastened correctly. The Safety Belt
Reminder is issued when the driver's safety belt
has not been fastened. The Safety Belt Reminder
is also activated at road speeds above approx.
5 mph or 8 km/h if the front passenger's safety
belt has not been fastened, if objects are placed
on the front passenger seat, or if driver or front
passenger unfasten their safety belts.
Damage to safety belts
If the safety belts are damaged or stressed
in an accident: have the safety belt system
and its seat-belt tensioners replaced and the
belt anchors checked. Have this work carried out
only by a MINI dealer or by a workshop that has
specially trained personnel working in accor-
dance with the specifications of the MINI manu-
facturer; otherwise, correct operation of these
safety systems is not ensured.<
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The front passenger's mirror is more
convex than the driver's mirror. The
objects seen in the mirror are closer than they
appear. Do not gauge your distance from traffic
behind you on the basis of what you see in the
mirror; otherwise, there is an increased risk of an
accident.<
1 Adjusting the left or right exterior mirror
2 Tilting mirrors in and out
To adjust electrically
1. Choose a mirror, and also turn the button to
position 1.
2. To adjust the mirror, tilt the button in the
desired direction forward, backward, left or
right.
Manual adjustment
If there is, for example, an electrical failure, press
on the edges of the mirror glass.
Tilting mirrors in and out
Turn the knob beyond the pressure point in
direction 2. The mirrors can be folded in at road
speeds up to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
This can be beneficial in narrow streets, for
example, or for moving mirrors that were folded
in by hand back out into their correct positions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Adjustments CONTROLS
53
Automatic heating
At external temperatures below a certain limit,
both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
while the engine is running or the ignition
switched on.
Interior rearview mirror
To reduce glare from vehicles behind you when
you are driving at night:
Turn the knob.
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature
It is controlled by two photosensors:
> Inside the interior rearview mirror, arrow
> On the back of the mirror.
For proper function:
> Keep the photosensors clean
> Do not cover the area between the interior
rearview mirror and the windshield
> Do not place stickers or decals on the wind-
shield in front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion; otherwise, there
is a risk of accident due to an unexpected move-
ment.<
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
distance and angle to suit your seated
position.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up; otherwise, the mechanism
will be damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
54
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
The right place for
children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening the
doors, for example.<
MINI Convertible: children should
always sit in the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
Only transport children under the age of
13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear
in a child restraint system suitable for their age,
weight and size. Otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury in the event of an
accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must be
buckled in with a safety belt as soon as there no
longer is any child restraint system that is appro-
priate for their age, size and weight.
Only install child seats in the rear when the
rear seat backrest is folded all the way
back and engaged. Otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury in the event of an
accident.<
Exception for front passenger seat
Front passenger airbags
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags must be deacti-
vated. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of
injury to the child if the airbags deploy, even if
the child is seated in a child restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 89.
Child restraint systems,
installation
Observe the child restraint system manu-
facturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child restraint systems.
Otherwise, the protective effect may be
diminished.<
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags for the front passen-
ger are deactivated; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
Seat position
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back and up as
possible to obtain the best possible position for
the belt. Do not change the seat position after
this.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
55
Child seat security
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster
The safety belt for the passenger can be pre-
vented from being pulled out in order to secure
child restraint systems.
MINI Convertible
All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be prevented from being
pulled out in order to secure child restraint
systems.
Locking the safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
LATCH child restraint
fixing system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.
To install and use the LATCH child restraint
system, follow the operating and safety
instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
system; otherwise, the protective function of the
seat may be compromised.<
MINI Convertible: anchor points for
LATCH anchors
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child restraint fixing system.
The anchor points for the lower LATCH anchors
are located behind the labeled protective caps.
Make sure that both lower LATCH anchors
are properly engaged and that the child
restraint system rests firmly against the seat
backrest; otherwise, the protective function of
the seat may be compromised.<
Child restraint system with tether strap
Use the tether strap anchors to secure
child restraint systems only; otherwise, the
anchors could be damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
56
MINI Coupe:
For child restraint systems with tether straps,
there is an additional anchor, arrow.
MINI Convertible:
There are two additional anchors for child
restraint systems with tether straps, arrows.
Placement of the tether strap
Make sure the upper tether strap does not
run over sharp edges and is not twisted as
it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap
will not properly secure the child restraint
system in the event of an accident.<
MINI Coupe
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Partition
4 Rear cargo well
5 Tether strap hook
6 Anchor
7 Seat backrest
8 Tether strap of the child restraint system
Attaching upper tether strap to the
attachment point
1. Removing front cargo area cover, see
page 110.
2. Slide the head restraint upward.
3. Guide the tether strap between the head
restraint holders.
4. Attach the tether strap to the anchor using
the hook.
5. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
6. Pull the tether strap tight.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
57
MINI Convertible
Ensure that the upper strap 9 is passed
between the seat backrest 8 and the
rollover protection system with cross member 3;
otherwise, the strap will not properly secure the
child restraint system.<
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Rollover protection system with cross
member
4 Cargo area cover
5 Rear cargo well
6 Tether strap hook
7 Anchor
8 Seat backrest
9 Tether strap of the child restraint system
Attaching upper tether strap to the
attachment point
1. Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Unlock backrest and slightly fold forward,
refer to page 112.
3. Guide the tether strap between the head
restraint holders.
4. Attach the tether strap to the anchor using
the hook.
5. Fold backrest back and lock in place. Push
headrest down as far as possible.
6. Pull the tether strap tight.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Driving
58
Driving
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Ignition lock
Inserting the key into the ignition lock
Insert the key all the way into the ignition lock.
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Removing the key from the ignition lock
Press in the key briefly. It is ejected slightly.
At the same time:
> The ignition is switched off if it was on
beforehand.
Automatic transmission
The key can only be removed if the selector lever
is in position P: interlock.
Start/Stop button
Press the Start/Stop button to switch radio readi-
ness or the ignition on and off. Do not depress
the brake or clutch while doing so.
If the Start/Stop button is pressed while
the clutch is depressed in the manual
transmission or the brake pedal is depressed in
the automatic transmission, the engine starts.<
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate. The
time and external temperature are displayed in
the tachometer.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the key is removed from the ignition
lock
> When using Comfort Access by pressing the
button on the door handle or the
button on the remote control, refer to
Locking on page 34
> After a certain has elapsed
Ignition on
Most indicator and warning lamps in indicator
area 1, page 13, light up for varying lengths of
time.
When the engine is off, switch off the
ignition and any unnecessary electrical
consumers in order to preserve the battery.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Driving CONTROLS
59
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps in the displays
go out.
The ignition switches off automatically if the
driver's door is opened. Pressing the Start/Stop
button again switches the ignition back on.
The ignition is not switched off in situations such
as the following:
> The clutch or brake is depressed
> The low beams are switched on
Starting the engine
Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, inhalation of the noxious
exhaust gases can lead to loss of consciousness
and death. Exhaust gases contain carbon
monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly
toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle
with the engine running; otherwise, such a
vehicle represents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the car while the engine is run-
ning, place the transmission in neutral or move
the selector lever to position P and forcefully
apply the parking brake to prevent the car from
moving.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion or repeated start attempts in which
the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is
not burned or inadequately burned and there is
a danger of overheating and damaging the
catalytic converter.<
Do not let the engine warm up with the vehicle
at a standstill. Move off immediately at a
moderate engine speed.
When starting the engine, do not depress the
accelerator pedal.
Manual transmission
Key in ignition lock or inside vehicle with
Comfort Access, refer to page 34.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Automatic transmission
Key in ignition lock or inside vehicle with
Comfort Access, refer to page 34.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Shift the selector lever into position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Switching off the engine
Always take the key with you when you
leave the vehicle.
When parking, apply the parking brake force-
fully; otherwise, the vehicle could begin to roll.
Secure the vehicle on steep upward and down-
ward slopes, for example, turn the steering
wheel towards the curb.<
Manual transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/
Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Driving
60
Automatic transmission
1. With the car at a stop, move the selector
lever to position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
Before driving into a car wash
By following these steps, the vehicle is able to
roll:
1. Place the remote control, even with Comfort
Access, in the ignition lock.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Move the selector lever to position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to
prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked;
it brakes the rear wheels.
In addition, follow the instructions on page 59
under Switching off the engine.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upward, press the button and lower
the lever.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake
has to be used to slow or stop the car, do
not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con-
tinuously press the button of the parking brake
lever.
Otherwise, excessive force could lead to over-
braking and loss of traction, i.e. fishtailing, at the
rear axle.<
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise,
the engine could be damaged if you inadvert-
ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left,
a slight resistance has to be overcome.
Automatic transmission
with Steptronic
In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can
shift gears manually using Steptronic, page 61.
Parking the vehicle
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always
select position P and apply the parking
brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running.<
Removing the key
To remove the key from the ignition lock, first
move the selector lever into position P and then
switch off the engine: interlock. Remove the key
from the ignition lock, refer to page 58.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Driving CONTROLS
61
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Displays in the tachometer
P R N D DS M1 to M6
The selector lever position is displayed, or the
current gear in the manual mode.
Changing selector lever positions
> The selector lever can only be moved out of
position P when the ignition is switched on
or the engine is running.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise, the selector lever will
refuse to move: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
depress the brake until you are ready to
start.<
A lock prevents accidental shifting into selector
lever positions R and P.
Overriding the selector lever lock
Press the button on the front of the selector
lever, arrow.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The front wheels are blocked.
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
Select this when you are in a car wash, for
example. The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All
forward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operation conditions, fuel con-
sumption is lowest when you drive in position D.
Kickdown
Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum
performance.
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the full-
throttle resistance point.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Move the selector lever from position D to the
left into the M/S shifting slot:
The Sport program is activated and DS is
displayed. This position is recommended for
a performance-oriented driving style.
To deactivate the Sport program or manual
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Driving
62
Shifting with the selector lever
Push the selector lever forward or pull it back to
activate manual operation. Steptronic shifts the
gear.
> Pull the selector lever in the + direction.
Transmission shifts up.
> Push the selector lever in the – direction.
Transmission shifts down.
The selected gear is displayed in the tacho-
meter, e.g. M1.
To use the automatic mode again, move the
selector lever to the right into position D.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when
they will result in a plausible combination of
engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a
downshift that would cause the engine to over-
rev will not be executed by the system. The
selected gear is displayed briefly, followed by
the current gear.
Shifting on the steering wheel
With the selector lever in position D, automatic
drive, you can shift gears using the shift paddles
on the steering wheel. The transmission auto-
matically switches to manual mode.
If you do not shift gears with the shift paddles or
accelerate for a certain amount of time, the
transmission automatically returns to D, auto-
matic drive.
> Pull one of the shift paddles.
Transmission shifts up.
> Push one of the shift paddles.
Transmission shifts down.
M1 through M6 are displayed in the tachometer.
Manually releasing the selector lever
lock
Should the selector lever refuse to move out of
position P even though the ignition is switched
on, the brake is depressed and the button on the
selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock
can be overridden:
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out. Disconnect the
cable connector if necessary.
3. Insert extractor hook 1 from the toolkit into
the loop on the passenger's side.
4. Pull the loop up.
5. Move the selector lever into the desired
position by pressing the button on the front
of the selector lever.
Before manually unlocking the selector
lever lock, firmly set the parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from rolling away.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Driving CONTROLS
63
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 Turn signal
2 Headlamp flasher
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that an indicator bulb has
failed.<
Signaling a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for
as long as you wish to signal a turn.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
You can set whether the turn signal flashes once
or three times.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Wiper system
Do not turn on the wipers when they are
frozen; otherwise, the wiper blades and
the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.<
Do not use the windshield wipers when
the windshield is dry; otherwise the wiper
blades may wear out faster or be damaged.<
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps
Switching on wipers
Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system switches to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Driving
64
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press button, arrow 3.
This symbol is displayed in the tacho-
meter.
Deactivate the rain sensor before entering
an automatic car wash. Failure to do so
could result in damage caused by undesired
wiper activation.<
Adjusting the sensitivity of the rain
sensor
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58.
2. Press the button in the turn signal indicator
as often as necessary until "SET/INFO" is
displayed.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Press the button as often as necessary until
the symbol and "SET" are displayed.
5. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
6. Press the button to select the desired sensi-
tivity.
7. Wait, or press and hold the button until the
display changes.
The settings are stored.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
Brief wipe
Press the lever downward once, arrow 2.
Cleaning windshield and headlamps
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and
the wipers are operated briefly.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched on,
the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Driving CONTROLS
65
In cars equipped with an alarm system, the
headlamps cannot be cleaned when the hood is
open.
Do not use the washers when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will
damage the washer pump.
Only use the washers if the hood has been
completely closed; otherwise, the headlamp
washer system may be damaged. Do not use the
washers if there is any danger that the fluid will
freeze on the windshield. If you do, your vision
could be obscured. For this reason, use anti-
freeze.<
Window washer nozzles
The window washer nozzles are heated auto-
matically while the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid is flammable. Keep it away
from ignition sources, only store it in the
closed, original container, and keep out of reach
of children; otherwise, there is a danger of
injury. Comply with the instructions on the
container.<
Washer fluid reservoir
Only refill washer fluid that contains anti-
freeze when the engine is cool, to avoid
contact with hot engine parts. Otherwise, fluid
spills constitute a fire hazard and a risk to
personal safety.<
Fill with water and, if required, with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling
the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
the correct concentration is maintained.<
Capacity
Approx. 2.6 US quarts/2.5 liters.
With headlamp washer system:
approx. 4.8 US quarts/4.5 liters.
Cruise control
The concept
Cruise control is available at vehicle speeds of at
least approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then
stores and maintains the speed that you specify
using the button on the steering wheel.
Do not use cruise control when driving at
constant speed is prevented by adverse
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or
poor road conditions due to, e.g. snow, rain, ice
or loose surfaces. Otherwise, you could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident as
aresult.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Driving
66
Activating
1 Maintaining, storing and increasing speed
2 Activating/deactivating cruise control
3 Maintaining, storing and decreasing speed
4 Resuming cruise control
Indicator lamp in the speedometer lights up. The
cruise control system is ready and can be acti-
vated.
Activating/deactivating cruise control
Press button 2.
The system is automatically deactivated if:
> Braking takes place
> The clutch is engaged
> The transmission is set on N
> The stability control system is on
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
again and maintained.
The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is
switched off.
Maintaining current speed
Press button 1.
The system maintains and stores the current
vehicle speed.
If, on a downhill grade, the engine braking effect
is not sufficient, the controlled speed may be
exceeded. On uphill grades vehicle speed may
drop if the engine output is insufficient.
Increasing speed
Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired
speed is reached. Every time you press the
button, the speed increases by approx. 1 mph
or 1 km/h.
Accelerating using the button
Press and hold button 1.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the
accelerator pedal. After the button is released,
the driving speed is maintained and stored.
Decreasing speed
Press button 3 repeatedly until the desired
speed is reached.
The functions here are the same as for increas-
ing the speed or accelerating, except that the
speed will be decreased.
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press button 4.
The last speed stored is achieved again and
maintained.
The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is
switched off.
Display on tachometer
Selected speed is displayed briefly.
If --- mph or --- km/h is displayed briefly in
the tachometer, the conditions necessary
for operation may not be fulfilled.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp in the tachometer
lights up if the system fails. A message
appears on the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Controls overview CONTROLS
67
Controls overview
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 13.2USgal/50liters.
You can find information on refueling on
page 197.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
The arrow next to the gas pump symbol of the
fuel gauge points toward the side of the vehicle
with the fuel filler flap.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone
of approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters the remaining indi-
cator lamps change from orange to red, arrow,
and a message is displayed briefly on the Control
Display. The tachometer displays the remaining
cruising range. When the range is less than
approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message remains
in the Control Display.
If the range displayed is less than
30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other-
wise, engine functions are not guaranteed and
damage may occur.<
With a dynamic driving style, e.g. rapid corner-
ing, engine functions are not always assured.
Tachometer
Never operate the engine with the needle in the
red overspeed zone of the gauge. In this range,
the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine.
Displays in tachometer
1 Current vehicle speed
2 Odometer in kilometers, trip recorder,
external temperature, time
3 Resetting the trip odometer
Press button on turn signal indicator to call up
information in the display area 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Controls overview
68
The following information is displayed sequen-
tially:
> Trip odometer
> Time
> External temperature
Trip odometer
To display trip recorder:
Briefly press button 3.
Resetting the trip odometer:
While the trip recorder is displayed and the
ignition is switched on, press button 3.
Time
To set time, see page 73.
External temperature, external
temperature warning
When the displayed temperature sinks to
approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a
warning lamp lights up. There is an increased
risk of black ice.
Even at temperatures above +377/+36
ice can form. Therefore, drive carefully,
e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the
shade; otherwise, there is an increased accident
risk.<
Units of measure
Select the respective units of measure, miles or
km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for the
external temperature, page 71.
Computer
Displays in tachometer
Press the button in the turn signal lever repeat-
edly to call up various items of information.
The following information is displayed sequen-
tially:
> Cruising range
> Average fuel consumption
> Current fuel consumption
> Average speed
> MINI Roadster, MINI Convertible: Always
Open Timer
To set the corresponding units of measure, refer
to Units of measure on page 71.
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated
on the basis of the way the car has been driven
over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of
fuel currently in the tank.
If the range displayed is less than
30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other-
wise, engine functions are not guaranteed and
damage could occur.<
Average fuel consumption
Calculated for the time the engine has been
running.
With the trip computer, page 69, you can have
the average fuel consumption for another trip
displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Controls overview CONTROLS
69
To reset average fuel consumption: press the
button in the turn signal lever for approx.
2 seconds.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption to allow
you to see whether your current driving style is
conducive to fuel economy with minimum
exhaust emissions.
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
With the trip computer, page 69, you can have
the average speed for another trip displayed.
To reset average speed: press the button in the
turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Always Open Timer
When driving the MINI Convertible or the MINI
Roadster with its convertible top down, the
driving times are displayed digitally on the
tachometer.
The following driving times are displayed:
1 Total driving time
2 Current driving time
To reset the display 2:
Press and hold the button in the turn signal lever
or the "Reset trip odometer" button, page 12,
for approx. 2 seconds.
To reset the total driving time, contact your MINI
dealer.
Analog Always Open Timer
The analog Always Open Timer indicates the
number of hours and minutes that you drove
with the convertible top down. A maximum of
6 hours and 59 minutes can be displayed.
The total driving time is displayed digitally in the
tachometer.
1 LED hour display
2 Minute display
Displays on the Control Display
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Displays in the "Onboard info":
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Controls overview
70
> Cruising range
> Distance from destination
> Probable arrival time when a destination has
been input into the navigation system,
page 120.
Displays in the "Trip computer":
> Departure time
> Trip duration
> Trip distance
Both displays show the following:
> Average fuel consumption
> Average speed
Reset fuel consumption and speed on
the onboard computer
To reset the values for the average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu entry.
2. Press the MINI joystick to confirm the
message.
Resetting the trip computer
To reset all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
Settings and information
Operating principle
Certain settings and information are only
available when the ignition is switched on, the
vehicle is at a standstill and the doors are closed.
1 Button for:
> Selecting display
> Setting values
> Confirming selected display or set values
> Calling up computer information 68
Symbol Function
Adjusting rain sensor 64
Calling up Check
Control 74
Exiting the menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Controls overview CONTROLS
71
Exiting displays
1. Press the button in the turn signal lever
repeatedly until "HOME" is displayed.
2. Press the button for a longer period.
Current vehicle speed is once again displayed.
Displays are also exited if no entries are made
for approx. 8 seconds.
Next setting or item of information
1. While in a setting or information item, press
the button in the turn signal indicator
repeatedly until "NEXT" is displayed.
2. Press the button for a longer period.
The display changes directly to the next setting
or item of information.
Units of measure
To set the units of measure. The settings are
stored for the remote control currently in use,
refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are briefly displayed
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can be
read out from the remote control by your
MINI dealer.<
More information on the MINI Maintenance
System can be found on page 215.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Controls overview
72
More information
Detailed information on service
requirements
You can have further information on the scope
of maintenance displayed on the Control
Display, refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry:
Select an entry and press the MINI joystick.
To exit from the menu:
Move the MINI joystick to the left. A list of
selected maintenance schedules and, if
required, legally mandated inspections, is
shown.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally man-
dated inspection is approaching. Please
schedule a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections
Make sure the date on the Control Display is
always set correctly, page 73; otherwise, the
effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is
not ensured.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. Open the deadline entry menu.
6. "Date:"
7. Create the settings.
8. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
9. Turn the MINI joystick to make the adjust-
ment.
10. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Move the MINI joystick to the left.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Controls overview CONTROLS
73
Clock
Setting the time
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and
press the MINI joystick.
5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes and
press the MINI joystick.
The system accepts the new time.
Setting the time format
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format and press the MINI
joystick.
The time format is stored.
Setting time zone
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
4. Turn MINI joystick until the desired time
zone is set and press the MINI joystick.
The time zone is stored.
Date
Setting date
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn MINI joystick until the desired day is
displayed and press the MINI joystick.
5. Create the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Controls overview
74
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys-
tems monitored. Check Control messages
involve indicator and warning lamps in the
display and, in some circumstances, an acoustic
signal as well as text messages at the bottom of
the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in
various combinations and colors in the indicator
areas 1 and 2.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
Supplemental text messages
For most Check Control messages, you can view
more information later, e.g. regarding the cause
of a malfunction and how to respond, refer to
page 75.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Exit display:
"OK"
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button in the turn signal lever.
> Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified.
They cannot be hidden. If several malfunc-
tions occur at the same time, they are
displayed in succession.
>They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Controls overview CONTROLS
75
> Other Check Control messages are auto-
matically hidden after approx. 20 seconds,
but remain stored.
>They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
The symbol indicates that Check Control
messages have been stored. Check Control
messages can be viewed whenever it is
convenient.
Viewing stored Check Control messages
Stored Check Control messages can only be
displayed if the driver's door is closed.
1. Press the button in the turn signal indicator
as often as necessary until "SET/INFO" is
displayed.
2. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
3. Press the button repeatedly until the corre-
sponding symbol and "CHECK INFO" appear
in the display.
4. Press and hold the button.
If there are no Check Control messages, then
"CHECK OK" is displayed.
If a Check Control message has been stored,
the corresponding message is displayed. In
addition, the text message appears on the
Control Display.
5. Press the button to check for other
messages.
Displaying on the onboard computer
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
5. Select a text message.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Controls overview
76
Speed limit
Enter a speed, and a Check Control message will
indicate when you reach this speed. This enables
you, for example, to receive warnings if you
exceed a speed limit in an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the MINI joystick to set the limit.
5. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the MINI joystick.
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the MINI joystick.
Altering settings
Language on the Control Display
You can set the language on the Control Display.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Controls overview CONTROLS
77
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the desired dialog.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Brightness of the Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. Note, however,
that you can change the basic setting while the
low beams are switched on. The setting is stored
for the remote control currently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired
setting is reached.
5. Press the MINI joystick.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use. In bright conditions, for
example, the brightness control may not be
clearly visible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
78
Technology for driving comfort and
safety
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Park Distance Control
PDC
The concept
PDC assists you with parking in reverse. Acoustic
signals and a visual indicator warn you of the
presence of an object behind the vehicle. To
measure the distance, there are four ultrasonic
sensors in either bumper.
These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/
2m. However, an acoustic warning does not
sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm
from the rear corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/
1.50 m from the rear center sensors.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached slowly,
as is usually the case when parking. Avoid
approaching an object at high speed; otherwise,
physical circumstances may lead to the system
warning being issued too late.<
Automatic mode
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system is activated automatically after
approx. 1 second when you engage reverse
gear or move the automatic transmission selec-
tor lever to position R. Wait this short period
before driving.
Acoustic signals
As the distance between vehicle and object
decreases, the intervals between the tones
become shorter. If the distance to the nearest
object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a
continuous tone sounds.
If the distance remains constant, e.g. when
driving parallel to a wall, the acoustic signal
stops after approx. 3 seconds.
Malfunction
Indicator lamp lights up. PDC has failed.
A message appears on the Control
Display. Have the system checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean
and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that
they will continue to operate effectively. When
using a high-pressure cleaner, do not direct the
jet toward the sensors for lengthy periods and
only spray from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.
PDC with visual warning
To have the system show distances to objects on
the Control Display. The contours of distant
objects are shown on the Control Display even
before the acoustic signal sounds. The display
appears on the Control Display as soon as the
transmission is shifted into reverse or the selec-
tor lever is moved into the R position.
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Sensors, too, have blind spots in
which objects cannot be detected. Moreover,
ultrasonic detection can reach its physical limits
with objects such as trailer tow bars and cou-
plings, thin and wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low
objects already indicated, such as curbs, may
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS
79
enter the sensors' blind spots before or after a
continuous audible signal is given. Higher, pro-
truding objects, such as wall ledges, may not be
detectable. Therefore, always drive cautiously;
otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage. Loud sound sources outside
or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal.<
Driving stability control
systems
Your MINI has a number of systems that help to
maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse
driving conditions.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with driving stability control systems.
An appropriate driving style always remains the
responsibility of the driver. Therefore do not
reduce the additional safety margin by engaging
in hazardous driving thereby running the risk of
an accident.<
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
Braking safely, refer to page 109.
ABS is operational every time you start the
engine.
Cornering Brake Control CBC
Driving stability and steering characteristics are
further enhanced while braking in turns or
during a lane change.
Electronic brake-force distribution EBV
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Brake Assist
Rapidly depressing the brake causes this system
to automatically develop maximum braking
force. Thus, the system helps keep braking
distance to a minimum. At the same time, all the
benefits provided by ABS are exploited.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
duration of the full braking application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
The concept
DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing
traction when you pull away from rest or
accelerate.
DSC also detects unstable driving conditions
such as when the vehicle's rear end fishtails or
the vehicle is sliding on its front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
output and through braking actions at the indi-
vidual wheels.
Every time that the engine is started, DSC is
ready to operate.
Deactivating DSC
Press the button until the DSC OFF indicator
lamp on the speedometer is on and DSC OFF is
displayed on the tachometer. DSC is deacti-
vated. Stabilizing and propulsion promoting
actions are no longer executed.
When driving with snow chains or to 'rock free'
in snow, it can be helpful to switch off DSC for a
brief period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
80
Activating DSC
Press the button again: the DSC indicator lamps
in the display elements go out.
For better control
The indicator lamp on the tachometer is
flashing:
DSC controls the driving and braking
forces.
The indicator lamp DSC OFF on the
speedometer is on and DSC OFF is
displayed on the tachometer:
DSC is deactivated.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC
The concept
DTC is a type of DSC that is propulsion optimized
for special road conditions such as uncleared
snowy roads. The system ensures maximum
propulsion though with restricted driving
stability. You therefore need to drive with
suitable caution.
In the following exceptional situations, it can be
useful to briefly activate DTC:
> When driving on snow-covered inclines, in
slush, or on uncleared snowy roads.
> When rocking the vehicle free, driving out of
deep snow or on loose surfaces.
> When driving with snow chains.
Activating DTC
Press the button; the indicator lamp DSC OFF on
the speedometer comes on and TRACTION is
displayed on the tachometer.
The Dynamic Stability Control DSC is deacti-
vated; the Dynamic Traction Control DTC is
activated.
For better control
The indicator lamp on the tachometer is
flashing:
DTC controls the driving and braking
forces.
The indicator lamp on the speedometer
is on and TRACTION is displayed on the
tachometer:
DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press button again, the indicator lamp DSC OFF
on the speedometer and TRACTION on the
tachometer go out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS
81
Deactivating both DTC and DSC
Press the button for at least 3 seconds; the indi-
cator lamp DSC OFF on the speedometer comes
on and DSC OFF is displayed on the tachometer.
The Dynamic Traction Control DTC and Dynamic
Stability Control DSC are both deactivated. There
will be no more stabilizing interventions.
Interventions (differential lock) in braking occur
to improve propulsion when drive wheels are
rotating unevenly, even when DSC is deacti-
vated.
Activating DSC
Press the button again: the indicator lamps go
out.
Hill Assist
Hill Assist aids you in comfortably driving off on
inclines. It is not necessary to use the parking
brake for this.
1. Hold the MINI with the brake.
2. Release the brake and immediately drive
off.
Hill Assist holds the car in place for approx.
2 seconds after the brake is released.
Depending on the load and gradient, the
vehicle can roll backward slightly during
this period. After you release the brake, immedi-
ately start driving since the Hill Assist only holds
the vehicle for about 2 seconds, and it will start
to roll backward.<
Sport button
Pressing the button causes your MINI to respond
even more sportily.
> Engine responds more spontaneously to
movements of the accelerator.
> Steering response is more direct.
> Cooper S, John Cooper Works: the engine
sounds more sporty in coasting mode.
With automatic transmission:
> More rapid gear shifting in Sport program.
Activating the system
Press the button.
The LED lights up.
SPORT is briefly displayed in the tachometer.
Deactivating the system
> Press the button again.
> Switch off the engine.
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster:
automatic rear spoiler
General information
The automatic rear spoiler increases the driving
stability of your MINI Coupe or MINI Roadster.
Make sure that the range of motion for the
rear spoiler is clear; otherwise, damage
may occur.<
Do not push on the rear spoiler; otherwise, it
may be damaged.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
82
For information on car washing facilities and
care, refer to page 217 and following.
Automatic mode
When starting the engine, a retracted rear
spoiler is in the automatic mode. It is possible
that there will be some noise for a short time
when driving off because of the initialization of
the system.
Automatic extension:
When driving at speeds in excess of approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Automatic retraction:
When driving at speeds below 38 mph/60 km/h.
In the automatic mode, the rear spoiler
can not be retracted manually at speeds
greater than 37 mph/60 km/h.<
Manual mode
The manual mode can, for example, be used
when cleaning the rear spoiler while the ignition
is on or the engine is running. LED on switch is
on.
If the rear spoiler stops in an intermediate
position after repeatedly being extended
and retracted, then the system has become
overheated. After a short cooling down time, the
rear spoiler can again be operated.<
Extending rear spoiler
Press the switch toward the rear.
Retracting rear spoiler
If the rear spoiler was manually extended and a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h not exceeded, then
the rear spoiler can again be retracted. Other-
wise, the rear spoiler cannot be retracted unless
the speed is below 37 mph/60 km/h.
> For speeds between 12 mph/20 km/h and
50 mph/80 km/h,
briefly press the switch forward or keep
pressed.
> For speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h,
press switch forward and keep pressed.
Malfunctions
Indicator lamp goes on briefly when the
ignition is switched on and an acoustic
signal is produced.
A message appears on the Control Display.
Display in the following situations:
> Rear spoiler is extended.
Manually retract rear spoiler or it will
automatically retract at a speed of approx.
12 mph/20 km/h.
> Rear spoiler can not be extended from the
rear spoiler compartment.
Check if the rear spoiler is free of snow or ice,
for example. Free rear spoiler or clear of ice.
Warning lamp goes on and an acoustic
signal sounds several times.
A message appears on the Control
Display.
Display in the following situation:
The rear spoiler can not be completely
extended; do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or
80 km/h.
Have the system checked.
When there is a malfunction at speeds greater
than 30 mph/50 km/h, the Dynamic Stability
Control DSC switches on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS
83
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla-
tion pressure in the tires.
The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by
comparing the rotational speeds of the indivi-
dual wheels while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and
therefore the rotational speed of the corre-
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
The system must have been initialized while the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Initialize the system after every correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
System limitations
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in
advance.<
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire
inflation pressure regularly.
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized.
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface.
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in
the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration.
> Snow chains are attached.
When the vehicle is driven with a space-saver
spare tire, page 230, the Flat Tire Monitor can-
not function.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be
displayed on the Control Display, e.g. whether or
not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initializing the system
The initialization process adopts the set inflation
tire pressures as reference values for the detec-
tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con-
firming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
5. Select "Reset" to start the initialization.
6. Start to drive.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
84
The initialization is completed during
driving, which can be interrupted at any
time. When driving resumes, the initialization is
continued automatically.<
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. An acoustic signal also
sounds. There is a flat tire or a major loss
in tire inflation pressure.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with
caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with
normal tires or with run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 208, are identi-
fied by a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC on the tire sidewall.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat
tires, do not continue driving; continuing
to drive can result in serious accidents.<
When a flat tire is reported, the Dynamic Stability
Control DSC is activated.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do so, check the inflation pressure in all
four tires.
The inflation pressure display of the Mobility
Kit, page 227, can be used for this purpose.
If the inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have
been initialized. The system must then be
initialized.
If it is not possible to identify the damaged
tire, contact your MINI dealer.
2. Use the Mobility Kit to remedy the flat tire on
the damaged wheel, refer to page 226, or to
replace the damaged wheel, refer to
page 229.
Run-flat tires
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph or 80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
When driving with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or
80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the air
pressure in all four tires.
If the inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have
been initialized. The system must then be
initialized.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire
depends on the load and the stress on the vehi-
cle while driving.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive
for approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When driving with damaged tires, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid
sooner when braking, braking distances will be
longer, or self-steering response will change.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid
turning abruptly and driving over obstacles such
as curbs, potholes, etc.
Since the possible driving distance depends to a
considerable degree on the strain exerted on
the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or,
with a gentle driving style, can also be longer,
depending on the speed, road condition, exter-
nal temperature, vehicle load, etc.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g.
reduced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
properties.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS
85
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate final failure of the tire. Reduce
your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop;
otherwise, pieces of tire may come off, which
could result in an accident. Do not continue
driving and contact your MINI dealer.<
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM
The concept
Measuring the inflation pressure in the four
mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is
a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Functional requirement
The system must have been reset while the
inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Reset the system again after each correction of
the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
System limitations
Sudden, serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in
advance.<
The system does not operate correctly if it has
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
indicated despite correct tire inflation pressures.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire:
> If a wheel without TPM electronics, e.g. a
compact spare wheel, is mounted.
> Interference with TPM by other systems
or devices with the same transmission
frequency.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
can be displayed by the onboard computer, e.g.
whether or not the TPM is activated.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
The status is displayed.
Status indicator on the onboard
computer
The tire and system condition is indicated by the
color of the tires.
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
driving is taken into account.
A correction is only required when this is
indicated by the TPM.
Green wheels
The inflation pressure corresponds to the
desired state.
"TPM active" is displayed on the onboard
computer.
Gray wheels
The system cannot detect a puncture.
Reasons for this may be:
> TPM is being reset.
> Interference from systems or devices with
the same transmission frequency.
> Malfunction.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
86
Resetting the system
Reset the system again after each correction of
the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine – do not drive away.
5. Select "Reset" to start the initialization.
6. Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the target
values to be monitored. The resetting process is
completed automatically as you drive. The tires
are depicted in green on the Control Display and
"Status: TPM active" is displayed again.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. When
driving resumes, resetting is continued auto-
matically.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is
resetting, all tires on the Control Display
are displayed in yellow. The message "Low tire!"
is displayed.<
Message for low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
onboard computer. An acoustic signal
also sounds.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with
caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with
normal tires or with run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 208, are identi-
fied by a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC on the tire sidewall.
When a low inflation pressure is reported, the
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do so, check the inflation pressure in all
four tires. The inflation pressure display of
the Mobility Kit, refer to page 227, can be
used for this.
If the inflation pressure is correct in all four
tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. The system must then be
reset.
If it is not possible to identify the damaged
tire, contact your MINI dealer.
2. Use the Mobility Kit to remedy the flat tire on
the damaged wheel, refer to page 226, or to
replace the damaged wheel, refer to
page. 229.
The use of tire sealant, e.g. Mobility Kit, can
damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this
case, have the electronics checked and
replaced if necessary at your earliest
opportunity.
Run-flat tires
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat
tires, do not continue driving; continuing
to drive can result in serious accidents.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS
87
Continued driving with a flat tire
When driving with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the air
pressure in all four tires.
If the inflation pressure is correct in all four
tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. The system must then be
reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire
depends on the load and the stress on the
vehicle while driving.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive
for approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When driving with damaged tires, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid
sooner when braking, braking distances will be
longer, or self-steering response will change.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid
turning abruptly and driving over obstacles such
as curbs, potholes, etc.
Since the possible driving distance depends to
a considerable degree on the strain exerted on
the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or,
with a gentle driving style, can also be longer,
depending on the speed, road condition,
external temperature, vehicle load, etc.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g.
reduced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
properties.<
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate complete failure of the tire.
Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a
stop; otherwise, pieces of tire may come off,
which could result in an accident. Do not con-
tinue driving and contact your MINI dealer.<
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continuously;
the larger warning lamp lights up in
yellow. On the onboard computer, the
tires are shown in gray and a message appears.
No punctures can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
> Wheel without TPM electronics is mounted:
If need be, have it checked by your MINI
dealer.
> Malfunction:
Have the system checked.
> TPM was unable to complete the resetting
procedure; reset the system again.
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continuously;
the larger warning lamp lights up in
yellow. On the onboard computer, the
tires are shown in gray and a message appears.
No punctures can be detected.
Display in the following situation:
> Malfunction because of other equipment or
devices, same radio frequency:
After leaving the interference area, the
system is again active automatically.
Message for unsuccessful system reset
Yellow warning lamp comes on. A
message appears on the onboard
computer.
The system has detected a wheel change, but
has not yet been reset. It is not possible to
provide a reliable warning about the current
inflation pressure.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system, page 86.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
88
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Systems
Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehi-
cle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pres-
sure for those tires. As an added safety feature,
your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres-
sure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not reached
the level at which the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale illuminates.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously lit. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
Airbags
1 Front airbags
2 Side/head airbags in the backrests
Protective action
Observe the instructions on page 48 to
ensure the best possible personal protec-
tion.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the head
and side airbags help provide protection in the
event of side impact. The side/head airbag sup-
ports the body in the lateral chest area as well as
the head.
The airbags are designed to not be triggered in
every type of collision, e.g. not in minor acci-
dents, certain rollover situations or rear impacts.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way.
Keep the dashboard and window on the passen-
ger side free from obstruction, i.e. do not cover it
with adhesive film or coverings, and do not affix
any holders such as for a navigation device or a
mobile phone.
Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other
objects not specifically approved for seats with
integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not
hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS
89
over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove
the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do
not modify the individual components of the
system or its wiring in any way. This includes the
upholstery in the center of the steering wheel,
on the instrument panel, the doors, and the roof
pillars as well as the sides of the headliner. Do
not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering
wheel.
Do not touch the individual components imme-
diately after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of
airbag generators executed only by a MINI
dealer or a workshop that works according to
repair procedures of the manufacturer of your
MINI with correspondingly trained personnel
and has the required explosives licenses. Other-
wise, unprofessional attempts to service the
system could lead to failure in an emergency or
undesired airbag activation, either of which
could result in personal injury.<
Warning notices and information about the
airbags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
An analysis of the impression in the front pas-
senger seat cushion determines whether and
how the seat is occupied. The front and side
airbags for the front passenger are activated
or deactivated by the system accordingly.
The indicator lamp above the interior
rearview mirror shows the current status
of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or
activated, refer to Status of front passenger
airbags below.<
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety precau-
tions and handling instructions under Transport-
ing children safely, page 54.
The front and side airbags can also be deacti-
vated by adolescents and adults sitting in certain
positions; the indicator lamp for the front pas-
senger airbags comes on. In such cases, the pas-
senger should change his or her sitting position
so that the front passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired
airbag status cannot be achieved by changing
the sitting position, transport the relevant pas-
senger on a rear seat. Do not attach covers,
cushions, ball mats or other items to the front
passenger seat unless they are specifically
recommended by the manufacturer of your
MINI. Do not place items under the seat which
could press against the seat from below. Other-
wise, a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not
ensured.<
Status of front passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags shows the functional status of the front
passenger's front and side airbags in accordance
with whether and how the front passenger seat
is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether
the front passenger airbags are activated or
deactivated.
> The indicator lamp comes on as intended
when a child in a specially designated child
restraint system is detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front
passenger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the
system. This particularly applies to
child seats that were required by NHTSA at
the time of manufacture of the vehicle. After
installing a child seat, check that the indica-
tor lamp for the front passenger airbags
lights up. It indicates that the child seat has
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
90
been detected and that the front passenger
airbags are deactivated.<
> The indicator lamp does not come on as long
as a person of sufficient size and in a correct
sitting position is detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front
passenger are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not come on if the
seat is empty.
The front and side airbags for the front
passenger are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
As of radio readiness, page 58, the warning
lamp lights up briefly to indicate that the entire
airbag system and the belt tensioners are
operational.
Airbag system malfunction
> The warning lamp does not come on when
radio readiness is switched on.
> The warning lamp stays lit continuously.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
have it checked without delay; otherwise,
there is the risk that the system will not function
as intended even if a severe accident occurs.<
MINI Convertible:
rollover protection
system
The rollover protection system is automatically
activated in the event of a sufficiently severe
accident or with an extreme inclination in the
longitudinal axis. The roll bar located behind the
rear seat headrest is projected within a fraction
of a second.
In addition to the reinforced windshield frame,
the rollover protection system increases the
safety for the vehicle occupants.
Never block the travel path of the rollover
protection system with any objects.
Always wear your safety belt, it protects you in
a minor car accident and, depending on the
severity of the accident, the safety belt tensioner
and the multilevel airbag system will protect
you.<
Lowering
If the rollover protection system releases
accidentally, have your MINI dealer check it.
If the rollover protective system is
extended, do not operate the convertible
top.
Never attempt to modify the individual compo-
nents or the electrical wiring of the rollover
protective system.
Have the necessary work on the rollover protec-
tion system of your MINI only carried out by an
authorized MINI dealer.
Faulty repair may lead to the failure of the
system or malfunctions.
Check the system regularly and in order to
ensure a long service life of all functions, it is
mandatory to maintain the service intervals,
refer to page 71.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Lamps CONTROLS
91
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lamps off / daytime running lights
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights
2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control, daytime
running lights, welcome lamps, and
Adaptive Light Control
When you open the driver's door with the
ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off if the light switch is
in position 0, 2 or 3.
Switch on the parking lamps if necessary, switch
position 1.
Parking lamps
Turn the light switch to position 1.
The front, rear and side vehicle lighting is
switched on.
Activation of lights on one side of the vehicle for
parking, page 93.
The parking lamps will discharge the
battery. Therefore, do not leave them on
for unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the
battery might not have enough power to start
the engine.<
Low beams
Turn the light switch to position 2.
The low beams come on when the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams
are switched on and off automatically depend-
ing on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel,
in twilight, or if there is precipitation. Adaptive
Light Control is active.
The headlamps may also come on when the sun
is sitting low on a blue sky.
When driving into tunnels with bright overhead
lights, there may be a delay before the head-
lamps come on.
The low beams remain switched on indepen-
dent of the ambient lighting conditions when
you switch on the fog lamps.
If the daytime running lights are activated,
page 92, the low beams are always switched on
with the light switch in position 3 and the igni-
tion on. The exterior lamps are automatically
switched off after the vehicle is parked.
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should respond to these kinds
of low-visibility situations by switching the head-
lamps on manually.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Lamps
92
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in the low beam or
automatic headlamp control position when you
switch off the ignition, the parking lamps and
interior lamps come on for a certain time as soon
as the vehicle is unlocked.
Pathway lighting
If you activate the headlamp flasher after
switching off the ignition with the lamps
switched off, the low beams come on and
remain on for a certain time.
The setting is stored for the remote control in
use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
Setting the duration or deactivating the
function
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.:"
4. Set a time of duration or deactivate the
function.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Daytime running lights
The light switch can remain in the lamps off,
parking lamps or automatic headlamp control
position.
In the lamps off position, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off after the vehicle is
parked. In the parking lamps position, the
parking lamps will stay on after the ignition is
switched off.
Switch on the parking lamps separately if
needed.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lights
The setting is stored for the remote control in
use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
Activating Adaptive Light Control
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 91.
Standstill function: to avoid blinding oncoming
traffic, the Adaptive Light Control does not pivot
toward the driver's side when the vehicle is at a
standstill.
In reverse, the Adaptive Light Control is not
activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Lamps CONTROLS
93
Malfunction
A message is displayed.
The Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or
failed. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
High beams/
roadside parking lamps
1 Turn signals/roadside parking lamps
2 Switching on high beams
3 Switching off high beams/headlamp flasher
Roadside parking lamps, left or right
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side for
parking. Comply with local regulations when
doing so.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down, arrow 1.
The roadside parking lamps drain the
battery. Therefore, do not leave them on
for unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the
battery might not have enough power to start
the engine.<
Switching off
Press the lever up or down to the pressure point.
Front fog lamps
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster
1 Front fog lamps
2 Rear fog lamp
Press the respective switch to turn the lamps on/
off.
MINI Convertible
> Turn on front fog lamps:
Press the switch upward
> Turn on rear fog lamps:
Press the switch downward
To switch them off, press the switch upward or
downward again.
Front fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The
green indicator lamp lights up when the fog
lamps are switched on.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fog
lamps are switched off when you activate the
headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Lamps
94
If the automatic headlamp control is
activated, the low beams will come on
automatically when you switch on the fog
lamps.<
Rear fog lamp
The low beams or parking lamps with fog lamps
must be switched on. The yellow indicator lamp
comes on when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
lighting only when the parking lamps or the low
beams are on.
The intensity of the brightness changes up to a
predetermined end point, and then decreases.
Adjusting brightness
> Briefly press button: brightness changes in
stages.
> Press and hold the button. Brightness
changes in a continuous manner.
Interior lamps
The interior lighting, the footwell lamps and the
luggage compartment lighting are automati-
cally controlled.
To reduce the drain on the battery, a short
while after the ignition is switched off,
refer to Start/Stop button on page 58, all lights in
the vehicle's passenger compartment are
switched off.<
Switching interior lamps on/off manually
To switch the interior lamps on/off.
Press the switch.
To switch off the interior lamps permanently,
press the switch for about 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
To switch the reading lamps on and off
Press the switch.
MINI Roadster with semi-automatic
convertible top
> To switch on interior lamps:
Press switches back together.
> To switch on reading lamps:
Press the switch forward.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Lamps CONTROLS
95
To turn off, press the respective switch forward
again or back.
Ambient lighting
The color and brightness of the ambient lighting
can be changed.
> Press the switch forward.
The color changes in stages.
> Press the switch toward the rear.
The brightness changes in stages.
Intermediate settings and colors are possible.
For a continuous color change in the
ambient lighting, press and hold the
switch forward for longer than 10 seconds.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Climate
96
Climate
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Equipment versions
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, your
MINI contains an air conditioner or an automatic
climate control.
1 Air conditioner
2 Automatic climate control
Air vents
3 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
4 Air to the upper body area, draft-free
ventilation
5 Air to the footwell
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Climate CONTROLS
97
Air conditioner
1 Air flow rate
2 Cooling function
3 Recirculated-air mode
4 Temperature
5 Rear window defroster
6 Air distribution
7 Windshield heating
Air flow rate
Adjust the air flow rate. The higher the
rate, the more effective the heating or
cooling will be.
The air flow rate is lowered or switched off
entirely to reduce the drain on the battery.
Switching the system on/off
Turn the air flow rate rotary switch to 0. Blower
and air conditioner are completely switched off
and the air supply is cut off.
Set any desired air flow rate to switch on the air
conditioner.
Cooling function
When the cooling function is on,
the air is cooled, dried, then
reheated according to the temper-
ature setting. The passenger compartment can
only be cooled while the engine is running.
The cooling function helps prevent condensa-
tion on the windows or removes it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
To cool the air more quickly and intensely
when the external temperature is high,
you can switch on the recirculated-air mode.<
Recirculated-air mode
If the air outside the car has an
unpleasant odor or contains pollut-
ants, shut off the supply to the inte-
rior of the car temporarily. The system then
recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.
If condensation starts to form on the inside
window surfaces, press the AUTO button or
switch off the recirculated-air mode and, if
necessary, increase the air flow rate. Ensure that
air can flow onto the windshield.
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used over an extended period of time;
otherwise, the air quality in the passenger
compartment will deteriorate continuously.<
Temperature
Turn upward, red, to increase the
temperature.
Turn downward, blue, to decrease the
temperature.
Rear window defroster
The defroster is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
The rear window heating is lowered
or switched off entirely to reduce the drain on
the battery.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Climate
98
Air distribution
Direct the flow of air to the
windows , to the upper body
area or to the footwell .
Intermediate settings are possible.
Windshield heating
The windshield heating is switched
off automatically after a short time.
The front window heating is
lowered or switched off entirely to reduce the
drain on the battery.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
1. Set air flow rate to the maximum level.
2. Set air distribution to position .
Condensation is removed from the windows
more quickly when the cooling function is
also activated.
3. Set to the highest temperature, red.
4. Deactivate recirculated-air mode.
5. Turn on windshield heating if necessary.
6. Turn on rear window defroster if necessary.
Microfilter
The microfilter captures dust and pollen. The
microfilter is changed by your MINI dealer
during routine maintenance work.
Automatic climate control
1 Air flow rate, manual
2 AUTO program
3 Recirculated-air mode
4 Maximum cooling
5 Air distribution, manual
6 Temperature
7 Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
8 Cooling function
9 Rear window defroster
10 Windshield heating
Comfortable interior climate
AUTO program 2 offers the ideal air distribution
and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer
to AUTO program below. All you need to do
is select an interior temperature which is
comfortable for you.
The following sections inform you in detail about
how to adjust the settings.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile set-
tings on page 27.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Climate CONTROLS
99
Air flow rate, manual
Press the – button to reduce air flow. Press
the + button to increase it.
You can reactivate the automatic mode
for the air flow rate with the AUTO button.
The air flow rate is lowered or switched off
entirely to reduce the drain on the battery. The
display remains the same.
Switching the system on/off
Reduce the air flow by pressing the – button
repeatedly until the system is switched off. All
displays go out.
Press the AUTO button to switch the automatic
climate control back on.
AUTO program
The AUTO program adjusts the air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, toward the upper body area and
into the footwell for you. The air flow rate and
your temperature specifications will be adapted
to outside influences in accordance with sea-
sonal changes, e.g. sunlight.
The cooling function is automatically switched
on along with the AUTO program.
The program is switched off if the air distribution
is manually adjusted or if the button is pressed
again.
Convertible Program
If the convertible top is open, the Convertible
Program is activated. During the Convertible
Program, the automatic climate control is opti-
mized for driving with the convertible top down.
Furthermore, with increasing vehicle speed, the
airflow is also increased.
If attaching the wind reflector, the perfor-
mance of the Convertible Program can be
significantly improved.<
Recirculated-air mode
If there are odors or pollutants in
the outside air, the supply of out-
side air can be shut off. The system
then recirculates the air currently within the
vehicle.
If condensation starts to form on the inside
window surfaces, press the AUTO button or
switch off the recirculated-air mode and, if
necessary, increase the air flow rate. Ensure that
air can flow onto the windshield.
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used over an extended period of time;
otherwise, the air quality in the passenger
compartment will deteriorate continuously.<
Maximum cooling
The automatic climate control
switches to the lowest tempera-
ture, high airflow and the recircu-
lated-air mode.
For maximum cooling, open the air vents for the
upper body area.
The air is cooled as quickly as possible:
> For an outside temperature of more than
327/06
> While the motor is running.
Air distribution, manual
The flow of air is directed to the
windows, to the upper body area or
to the footwell as selected.
You can switch the automatic air
distribution back on by pressing the AUTO
button.
Temperature
Set the desired temperature individually.
The automatic climate control achieves
this temperature as quickly as possible
regardless of the season, using maximum
cooling or heating power if necessary, and then
maintains it.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Climate
100
If you switch between different tempera-
ture settings in quick succession, the auto-
matic climate control does not have enough
time to achieve the set temperature.<
Rear window defroster
The defroster is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly removes ice and condensa-
tion from the windshield and front
side windows.
For this purpose, also switch on the
cooling function.
The windshield heating is switched on auto-
matically.
Windshield heating
The windshield heating is switched
off automatically after a certain
time.
Cooling function
When the cooling function is on,
the air is cooled, dried, then
reheated according to the temper-
ature setting. The passenger com-
partment can only be cooled while
the engine is running.
The cooling function helps prevent condensa-
tion on the windows or removes it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started. The
recirculated-air mode may be switched on auto-
matically.
When the AUTO button is pressed, the cooling
function switches on automatically.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter captures dust and pollen. The
activated-charcoal filter provides additional
protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from
the outside air. Your MINI dealer replaces this
combined filter as a standard part of your
scheduled maintenance.
You can call up further information in the service
requirements display, page 71.
Ventilation
1 Knob for continuous opening and closing
2 Jet for direction of air flow
Opening/closing
Turn the knob.
Direction of air flow
Swivel the entire jet.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories CONTROLS
101
Practical interior accessories
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Glove compartment
Opening
Press the button to open the cover.
The light in the glove compartment comes on.
Closing
Fold cover up.
To prevent injury in the event of an
accident, close the glove compartment
after use while the vehicle is being driven.<
MINI Convertible, MINI Roadster:
locking
Use the integrated key of the remote control,
refer to page 26.
Ventilation
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
glove compartment can be ventilated and, if the
cooling function is switched on, can also be
cooled.
Opening
Rotate the switch in the direction of the arrow.
Closing
Rotate the switch in the opposite direction of the
arrow until it is in the vertical position.
Depending on the temperature setting of the air
conditioner or the automatic climate control,
high temperatures may result in the glove
compartment.
USB interface for data transfer
For the updating of navigation data, refer to
page 118 on USB media via the USB interface in
the glove box.
Observe the following when connecting:
> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB
interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
> Do not connect USB hard drives.
> Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Practical interior accessories
102
Connection for external
audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over
the vehicle's speaker system, refer to the Enter-
tainment chapter starting on page 152.
Center armrest
The center armrest between the front seats
contains either a compartment or the cover for
the snap-in adapter, see page 173.
Opening
The cover slides along guide rails and can be
opened fully by pushing it back and lifting it.
Closing
Push the cover forward.
Storage compartments
Do not put any unsecured objects into the
interior of the vehicle; otherwise these
may endanger the occupants, e.g., during
braking and evasive maneuvers.<
Do not use the instrument panel as a shelf,
for example with non-slip mats; other-
wise, it could be damaged.<
In the vehicle interior
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you
will find storage compartments in the doors,
next to the rear seats and in the center console.
The map compartments in the MINI Convertible
are located next to the rear seats.
Nets are located in the passenger footwell and
on the backs of the front seat backrests.
Storage compartment on the front
passenger side
Opening
Briefly press the bottom edge of the cover.
Closing
Push the cover back into its original position.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent, close the storage compartment after
use while the vehicle is being driven.<
MINI Convertible, MINI Roadster:
The storage compartment cannot be locked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories CONTROLS
103
Clothes hooks
There are clothes hooks on the grab handles in
the rear passenger compartment.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do not
hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise,
they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in
case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: lateral
storage tray behind the seats
Briefcases, for example, can be placed here.
Only transport light and small objects in
the lateral storage tray, otherwise, e.g.
during braking and evasive maneuvers, a hazard
will be posed by flying objects. Transport heavy
luggage only if it is appropriately secured in the
cargo area.<
In the cargo area
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you
have the following storage options:
> Net on the rear cargo well and side trim for
smaller objects; for attaching to the lashing
eyes and the hook on the cargo area side-
wall
Cupholders and ashtray
Cupholders
Two cupholders are located in the front of the
center console; another is in the rear at the back
of the center console.
Use lightweight, nonbreakable containers
and do not transport hot beverages.
Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury
in the event of an accident.<
Do not push unsuitable containers forcibly
into the cupholder. Otherwise, you may
damage it.<
Ashtray
The ashtray is located in one of the cupholders in
the center console.
Emptying
Remove the entire ashtray.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CONTROLS Practical interior accessories
104
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the key so
that children cannot operate the cigarette
lighter and burn themselves.<
Connecting electrical
appliances
In your MINI, when the engine is running or if the
ignition is switched on, you can use electrical
devices such as flashlights, car vacuum cleaners,
etc., up to approx. 140 watts at 12 volts, as long
as one of the following sockets is available.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Do not connect battery chargers to the
sockets installed in the vehicle at the
factory; otherwise you may cause damage to
the vehicle.<
Cigarette lighter socket
Remove the lighter or cover from the socket.
Power socket in cargo area
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster:
Pull out the cover.
MINI Convertible
Pull out the cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Drive Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATIONS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
DRIVING TIPS
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
108
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. Please follow the instructions below
in order to achieve the optimal service life and
economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
not exceed the following:
> Gasoline engine
4,500 rpm or 100 mph/160 km/h
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode.
After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
traction potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Ground clearance
When driving, ensure that there is suffi-
cient ground clearance, such as when
entering underground parking garages, driving
over curbs or when driving in winter; otherwise
damage to the vehicle may result.<
Close the tailgate
Only drive with the tailgate closed. Failure
to do so may endanger passengers or
other road users or may damage the vehicle in
the event of an accident or a braking and eva-
sive maneuver. In addition, exhaust gas may
flow into the passenger compartment.<
If special circumstances make it absolutely
necessary to drive with the tailgate open:
1. Coupe: close all windows.
2. Switch off the recirculated-air mode and
switch the airflow control of the heating, air
conditioner, or automatic climate control to
high, refer to page 97 or 99.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
109
Hot exhaust system
As in all vehicles, extremely high tempera-
tures are generated on the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to various sections of the exhaust
system, and never apply undercoating to them.
Make sure that when driving, idling or when
parking, no easily flammable materials, such as
hay, leaves, grass, etc. come into contact with
the hot exhaust system. Such contact could lead
to a fire, with the risk of serious personal injuries
and property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust
tail pipes. Otherwise, there is a risk of burns.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road
surface. This situation, known as hydroplaning,
can cause partial or complete loss of tire contact
with the road surface, so that the car cannot be
steered or braked properly.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declining
tread depth on the tires, refer also to Tread
depth on page 207.
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is
not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle with
the clutch; use the parking brake. Other-
wise, greater clutch wear will result.<
For information on driving off using Hill Assist,
refer to page 81.
Braking safely
Your MINI is equipped with ABS. If you are in a
situation which requires full braking, it is best to
brake using maximum brake pressure. Since the
vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you
can still avoid possible obstacles with a mini-
mum of steering effort.
The pulsation of the brake pedal, together with
the sound of hydraulic regulation, indicates that
ABS is functioning properly.
Objects in the movement range of the
pedals
Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects
out of the movement range of the pedals;
otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the
pedals during driving.
Do not place additional floor mats onto an
existing one or onto other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened.
Make sure that the floor mats are securely
fastened again after they have been removed,
e.g. for cleaning.<
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every
few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure
that this maneuver does not endanger other
road users. The heat generated in this process
helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that.
Then full braking force will be immediately
available when it is needed.
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces-
sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing
excessive loads on the brake system. Downshift-
ing in manual mode of the automatic transmis-
sion, page 61.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
110
Never drive with the clutch held down,
with the transmission in neutral or with
the engine switched off; otherwise, engine
braking action will not be present or there will be
no power assistance to the brakes or steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
pedals; otherwise, pedal function could be
impaired.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When the vehicle is parked
Condensation forms while the automatic climate
control is in operation, and then exits under the
vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are therefore normal.
In the MINI Cooper S, the coolant pump may
continue to run for some time after the engine is
switched off. This will generate noise in the
engine compartment.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result can
assume the form of a sudden blowout.<
Avoid fluid spills in the cargo area as they
could damage the vehicle.<
MINI Coupe: cargo area cover
Do not place any objects on the cover;
otherwise, they could endanger the car's
occupants, e.g. in the case of braking or sudden
swerving, or they may damage the cover.<
Your MINI Coupe is equipped with two cargo
area covers. When you open the tailgate, the
rear cargo area cover is raised.
The cargo area covers can be removed
individually.
Front cargo area cover
Pull cargo area cover back out of the holders,
arrow 1.
Rear cargo area cover
1. Pull release, arrow 1, left and right.
2. Pull cargo down out of the holders arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
111
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: opening for
loading
Always secure snowboards and similar
items; otherwise, these may pose a hazard
to occupants during braking or evasive maneu-
vers.<
1. If necessary, fold seat forward, see page 50.
2. Open lock with integrated key, see page 26.
3. Pull handle and fold lid down.
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: storage
compartment in luggage compartment
In the front of the luggage compartment, there
is a storage compartment under a cover.
By way of example, the illustration shows the
cargo area in the MINI Coupe.
1. Open load opening over the passenger
compartment.
2. Fold up cover, arrow 1.
MINI Convertible: luggage compartment
Do not place any objects on the luggage
compartment roller cover, as this may
damage the cover or the convertible top.<
Loading aid
When the convertible top is closed, you can
load the vehicle more easily by releasing the
convertible top and folding it up.
1. Release the convertible top using the
handles, refer to arrows 1.
2. Lift the convertible top, refer to arrow 2.
3. Fold back the handles and place them on
holders 3.
Expanding the luggage compartment
volume
You can enlarge the luggage compartment
volume when the convertible top is closed.
1. Fold the convertible top upward, refer to
Loading aid.
2. Pull luggage compartment roller cover
rearward out of the lower brackets and pivot
upward, refer to arrows 1,
3. Push cover into the upper storage areas,
refer to arrows 2 and place down horizon-
tally.
To operate the convertible top, move the
cargo area cover back to its lower posi-
tion.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
112
Split-folding rear seats
To be able to transport larger objects, the rear
backrest can be folded down.
1. If necessary, use the integrated key to open
the backrest lock 1.
2. Press button 2 and fold down backrest
together with the belt strap.
3. Fold the backrest forward.
When folding the backrest back into its
original position, always ensure that the
catch engages securely. A loose backrest might
fail to prevent cargo from entering the passen-
ger compartment during sudden braking or
evasive maneuvers, posing a potential hazard to
occupants.
The belt guide loop, refer to page 52, must be
closed.<
Determining cargo limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, this could
damage the vehicle and produce unstable
vehicle operating conditions.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX pounds or YYY
kilograms.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs:
1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
113
MINI Convertible:
The permissible load is the sum of the occu-
pants' weights and the weight of the cargo. The
greater the weight of the occupants, the less
cargo/luggage can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Position heavy objects as low and as far
forward as possible, ideally directly behind
the rear seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
respective opposite buckle.
> Do not stack higher than the top edge of the
backrests.
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster
MINI Convertible
Securing cargo
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster:
MINI Convertible:
> Secure smaller and lighter items using
retaining or draw straps.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps for securing larger
and heavier objects are available at your
MINI dealer. Four lashing eyes are provided
for attaching the cargo straps. Two of them
are located on the forward wall of the cargo
area.
Comply with the information enclosed with
the load-securing devices.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
114
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or swerves are necessary.
Do not exceed the approved gross vehicle
weight and axle loads, page 247; otherwise,
the operating safety of the vehicle is no longer
assured and the vehicle will not be in compli-
ance with the construction and use regulations.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be thrown
around, for example as a result of heavy braking,
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu-
pants. Do not secure cargo using the fastening
points for the tether strap, page 55; they may
become damaged.<
Rear luggage rack
A special rack system is available as an option for
your MINI. Please note the information con-
tained in the assembly instructions.
Mounting points
The mounting points are under the protective
caps in the bumper.
Push out the caps at the respective slots.
Loading rear luggage rack
When loading, make sure that the maximum
allowed roof load, the gross vehicle weight and
the axle loads are not exceeded.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 247.
Saving fuel
Your vehicle incorporates numerous technolo-
gies for reducing fuel consumption and emis-
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of
different factors. Fuel consumption and environ-
mental pollution are affected by various actions,
the manner of driving and regular maintenance.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts no longer in use
Remove luggage rack if no longer needed after
use.
Attached parts on the vehicle affect its aerody-
namics and increase fuel consumption.
Closing windows
Open windows increase air resistance and
therefore fuel consumption.
Check tire inflation pressure regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low inflation pressure increases rolling
resistance and thus leads to greater fuel
consumption and tire wear.
Drive off immediately
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is
the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its
operating temperature.
Think ahead while driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. by
maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead.
Looking-ahead and smooth driving reduces fuel
consumption.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
115
Avoid high engine speeds
Use first gear only for driving off. In second and
higher gears, accelerate smoothly to a suitable
engine and road speed. In doing so, avoid high
engine speeds and shift up early.
When you reach your desired traveling speed,
shift to the highest suitable gear and drive at
constant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Coasting
When approaching a red traffic light, take your
foot off the accelerator and let the car roll to a
stop in the highest gear possible.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the
accelerator and let the vehicle coast in a suitable
gear.
Fuel supply is shut off automatically when the
vehicle is coasting.
Switch off the engine during lengthy
stops
Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy
periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings or
in traffic jams.
Switch off any features that are not
currently required
Features such as air conditioning, seat heaters
and the rear window defroster require a great
deal of energy and result in greater fuel con-
sumption, especially in city driving and during
Stop & Go operation. For this reason, switch off
these features if they are not really needed.
Have the vehicle serviced
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
good economy and a long vehicle life. The
manufacturer of your MINI recommends having
the vehicle serviced by a MINI dealer. Also note
the MINI Maintenance System, page 215.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Follow Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATIONS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
NAVIGATION
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Navigation system
118
Navigation system
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
The navigation system can determine the
precise position of the vehicle, with the aid of
satellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably
guide you to every entered destination.
Enter data only with the vehicle station-
ary, and always give priority to the appli-
cable traffic regulations in the event of any con-
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. Failure to take to this precaution can
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle
occupants and other road users in danger.<
Selecting navigation
1. "Navigation"
During route guidance, an arrow view or a map
view is displayed on the onboard computer.
Navigation data
Information on navigation data
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version"
Information about the data version is displayed.
Updating the navigation data
General information
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and
can be updated.
You may obtain current navigation data and the
enabling code at your MINI dealer.
Updating the data can take several hours,
depending on the volume of data.
> Update data while driving to reduce the
drain on the battery.
> The update is resumed automatically when
a trip is continued after an interruption.
> Only the main functions of the navigation
system are available during updating.
> You can inquire as to the status of the
update.
> The data are stored in the vehicle.
> After the updating process is complete, the
system restarts.
> The medium with the navigation data can be
removed after the update.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Navigation system NAVIGATION
119
To update
1. Insert USB storage device with navigation
data
> into the USB interface in the glove
compartment
> into the USB audio interface.
2. Follow the instructions on the onboard
computer.
3. Enter the activation code of the USB storage
device.
4. Begin driving.
After you begin to drive, the system restarts and
updates the navigation data as you drive.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Destination entry
120
Destination entry
General information
In entering your destination you can select from
among the following options:
> Manual destination entry, see below
> Selecting destination from address book,
page 122
> Last destinations, page 123
> Special destinations, refer to page 124
> Entering the destination via map, refer to
page 125
> Selecting home address, refer to page 123
> Entering destination via voice, page 126
After selecting your destination you can proceed
to start the route guidance, page 129.
Manual destination
entry
To make it easier to enter town/city names and
street names, you are supported with the word-
match principle, refer to page 127. This makes it
possible to enter different spellings and com-
pletes your entry automatically so that stored
town/city names and street names can be
accessed quickly.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
The system also supports you with the following
features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town
or city.
> You can skip the entry of country and town/
city if the current entries should be retained
for your new destination.
Entering a state/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "State/Province" or displayed country.
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or displayed
city.
2. Select letters, if necessary.
A list of all towns/cities starting with this let-
ter appears on the Control Display.
To delete letters:
> To delete individual numbers or letters:
Turn the MINI joystick to highlight
and press the MINI joystick.
> To delete all numbers or letters:
Turn the MINI joystick to highlight
and press and hold the MINI joystick.
3. If necessary, enter more letters.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Destination entry NAVIGATION
121
To enter spaces, if necessary:
Select the symbol.
4. If necessary, move the MINI joystick to the
right and change to the list of towns and
cities and select a name.
Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or displayed
city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
cities.
5. Highlight the postal code.
6. Select the zip code.
The corresponding destination is displayed.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or displayed street.
2. Enter the street and intersection the same
way you entered the town/city.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Move the MINI joystick to the right to
change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight street.
3. Select the street.
Alternative: entering street and house
number
1. Select "Street" or displayed street.
2. Enter the street the same way you entered
the town/city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the digits.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Entering a street without a destination
town/city
It is also possible to enter a street without
entering a destination town/city. In this case all
streets of the entered country are offered for
selection. The related town/city is displayed
after the street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, this
entry can be canceled. This may be practical if
the desired street does not exist in the entered
destination, because, for example, it belongs to
another part of the town/city.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" with the currently displayed
country.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight street.
9. Select the street.
Starting route guidance after entering
the destination
1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina-
tion".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Destination entry
122
> Setting "Route preference", refer to page
129.
> Search for "Points of Interest at loc.", refer to
page 124.
Address book
To create contacts, refer to page 171 or
page 185.
Selecting a destination from the address
book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these addresses have been checked as
destinations.
If the contacts with addresses from the
mobile phone are not displayed, they must
first be checked as destinations, refer to
page 172 or page 185.
3. Select a contact in the list or if so desired,
using the "A-Z search".
4. If necessary, select "Business address" or
"Home address".
Storing a destination in the address
book
Store the destination in the address book after
entering the destination.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
6. Select an existing contact, if available.
7. Select "Business address" or "Home
address".
8. Enter "Last name" and "First name" if you
wish.
9. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
Your current position can be stored in the
address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Destination entry NAVIGATION
123
4. Depending on the selection, select an
existing contact from the list or the type of
address and enter the last and first name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".
Using home address as destination
The home address must be stored as a destina-
tion. Refer to Defining a home address,
page 171 or page 186.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
4. "Start guidance"
Last destinations
The last destinations are stored automatically.
These destinations can be called up and used as
a destination for route guidance.
Accessing last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance"
Editing a destination
Destinations can be edited, for example, to
change the house number of an existing entry.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina-
tions".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Destination entry
124
Special destinations
You can search for a special destination, e.g.
a hotel or place of interest, and start route
guidance to the corresponding location.
The scope of information provided
depends on the particular set of naviga-
tion data you are using.<
Accessing search for special
destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. Select "Points of Interest"
search.
A-Z search
1. "A-Z search"
2. "Town/City"
3. "Category"
4. "Category details"
For some special destinations, it is possible
to select several category details. Move the
MINI joystick to the left to exit category
details.
5. "Keyword"
6. Enter keyword.
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
7. Select the special destination.
8. Select the symbol.
9. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina-
tion".
If several details are stored, then you can
scroll through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.
Category search
1. "Category search"
2. "Search destination"
3. Select or enter town/city.
4. "Category"
5. Select category.
6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, it is possible
to select several category details. Move the
MINI joystick to the left to exit category
details.
7. "Start search"
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
8. Select the special destination.
Details are displayed.
9. Select the symbol.
10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina-
tion".
If several details are stored, then you can scroll
through the pages. If a phone number is avail-
able, a connection can be established, if desired.
Special destination location
As you input the search destination, you can
select from among various options.
> "At current location"
> "At destination"
> "At different location"
> With active route guidance: "Along route"
Starting the search for special
destinations
1. "Start search"
2. A list of the special destinations is displayed.
> "At current location"
The special destinations are displayed in
order of their distance and are displayed
with a direction arrow pointing toward
the destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Destination entry NAVIGATION
125
> "At destination", "At different location",
"Along route"
The special destinations are displayed in
order of their distance from the search
point.
> Destinations of the selected category are
displayed in the map display as symbols.
The display depends on the map scale
and the category.
3. Highlight special destination.
4. Select the special destination.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina-
tion".
The distance from the destination is displayed.
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations in
the map:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the settings.
Entering the destination
via map
If you only know the location of a destination or
street, then you can enter the destination with
the aid of the map.
Selecting the destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
The map shows the current position of the
vehicle.
3. "Interactive map"
4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> Changing scale: turn the MINI joystick.
> Moving map: move the MINI joystick in
the corresponding direction.
> Shifting map diagonally: move the
MINI joystick in the corresponding direc-
tion and turn the MINI joystick.
5. Press the MINI joystick to display additional
menu items.
> Select the symbol: "Start guidance" or
"Add as another destination".
> "Find points of interest": the search for
special destinations is started.
Specifying the street
If the system does not detect any street, then a
street name in the vicinity or the coordinates of
the destination are displayed.
Additional functions
In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted
and the visible map section can be shifted. You
can also access other functions by pressing the
MINI joystick:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Destination entry
126
> Select the symbol and "Start guid-
ance" if necessary.
> "Exit interactive map"
> Map display
> "Display destination"
The section of the map around the
destination is displayed.
> "Display current location"
The section of the map around the
current position is displayed.
> "Find points of interest", refer to
page 124.
Entering destination via
voice
General information
> Voice activation system, refer to page 21.
> When entering a destination by voice, it is
possible to switch between voice input and
the onboard computer.
> Having the possible spoken commands read
aloud: {Voice commands}
Saying the entries
> Countries, towns/cities, streets, and inter-
sections can be either spoken aloud as an
entire words or spelled in the system
language, refer to page 76.
Example: to enter a destination in a US state
as a complete word, the system language
must be English.
> Spell the entry if the language of the area is
different from the system language.
> Speak the letters smoothly and avoid exces-
sive emphasis and pauses.
Entering a town/city
The town/city can be spelled or entered as an
entire word.
The methods of entry depend on the
navigation data in use and the country
and language settings.<
2. Wait for the system prompt for the town/
city.
3. Say the name of the town/city or if neces-
sary, spell at least the first three letters.
Similar-sounding towns/cities that cannot
be differentiated by the system are com-
piled in a separate list and displayed as a town/
city followed by three dots.
If necessary, select this entry with {Yes}. Then
select the desired city/town in this list.<
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via the onboard computer:
Turn the MINI joystick until the destination is
selected, and press the MINI joystick.
1. {City} or {Spell city}.
4. Select city/town:
> To select a recommended town/city:
{Yes}
> Select other city/town: {New entry}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry …}
> Spell the entry: {Spell city}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Destination entry NAVIGATION
127
Entering a street or intersection
The street or intersection is entered in the same
way as the town/city.
Entering house number
Depending on the data in the navigation system,
house numbers up to the number 2,000 can be
entered:
Starting route guidance
Route guidance starts immediately.
Adding further intermediate
destinations
Further intermediate destinations can be added.
Saving destination
The destination is automatically added to the list
of the last destinations.
Planning a trip with
intermediate
destinations
New trip
Various intermediate destinations can be
entered for a trip. The trip destination must be
entered first, refer to Destination input,
page 120.
Entering intermediate destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for one trip.
1. "Navigation"
2. Select the type of destination entry and
enter the intermediate destination.
3. "Add as another destination"
4. Select the location where the intermediate
destination is to be inserted.
Starting the trip
After entering all intermediate destinations:
"Start guidance"
Word-matching principle
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier to enter the names of towns or streets.
The system runs ongoing checks, comparing
your destination entries with the data stored in
the vehicle as the basis for instant response. The
user benefits include:
> Town/city names can also be entered
differently from the official names if you use
a form that is customary in other countries.
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
3. {Yes} to confirm the house number.
4. {Accept destination}
{Start guidance}
{Add as another destination}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Destination entry
128
Example:
Instead of "München", you can also enter
the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian
spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns/
cities and streets the system will complete
them automatically as soon as enough let-
ters are available to ensure unambiguous
identification.
> The system offers only those letters for
selection of name entries that are stored in
the vehicle. The system will not accept non
existent names and addresses.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Route guidance NAVIGATION
129
Route guidance
Starting route guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Accept destination"
5. "Start guidance"
> The route is displayed on the onboard
computer.
> The distance to the destination/interme-
diate destination and the estimated time
of arrival are displayed in the map view.
> The arrow display is displayed on the
onboard computer, if so desired.
Terminating route
guidance
In the arrow or map view
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing route
guidance
If the destination was not reached during the
last trip, route guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
> You can influence the calculated route by
selecting certain criteria.
> Route criteria can be changed during desti-
nation input and during route guidance.
> Street types are part of the navigation data
and are taken into account in route plan-
ning, e.g. avoiding highways.
> The proposed route can differ from personal
experience.
> The settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
> Route guidance with traffic information,
refer to page 135.
Changing route criteria
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Selecting a criterion:
> "Fast route": time-optimized route
through a combination of the least
possible distance and stretches of road
that allow rapid driving.
> "Efficient route": optimized combi-
nation of the fastest and shortest
possible route.
> "Short route": short distance without
taking time into account.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Route guidance
130
> "Alternative routes": suggestions of
additional alternate routes during route
guidance.
5. Select additional route criteria, if desired.
Where possible, the selected criteria will be
avoided on the route.
> "Avoid highways": avoid highways
where possible.
> "Avoid toll roads": avoid toll roads where
possible.
> "Avoid ferries": avoid ferries where
possible.
The setting applies to the current route and to
the planning of future routes.
If the route criteria "Avoid highways",
"Avoid toll roads", or "Avoid ferries" are
selected, then this can prolong the calculation
time for the route.<
Route
There are various views of the route available
during route guidance:
> Arrow display
> List of streets and towns/cities
> Map view, refer to page 131
Arrow display
The following information is displayed during
route guidance:
> Large arrow: current direction of travel.
> Street name of the currently traveled street.
> Small arrow: indicates the next change of
direction.
> Intersection view.
> Lane information.
> Traffic information.
> Distance to the next change of direction.
> Street name of the next change of direction.
Lane information
In the arrow display, the recommended lanes
of multi-lane roads are each marked with a
triangle.
> Filled triangle: optimum lane.
> Empty triangle: likewise possible lane. It can,
however, also be possible to briefly make
additional lane changes.
List of roads or towns/cities on the route
If the route guidance has been started, then you
can display a list of the roads and towns/cities on
the route. The distance to be traveled and traffic
bulletins are displayed for each segment of the
route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a section.
Taking detours
During route guidance, prompt the navigation
system to bypass certain route segments. In
doing so, you will specify how many kilometers
to travel before returning to the original route.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Route guidance NAVIGATION
131
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. Turn the MINI joystick: enter the desired
mileage.
5. Press the MINI joystick.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be
bypassed:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. "Remove blocking"
Recommended refueling
The remaining driving range is calculated, and
gas stations along the route are shown.
Even with the latest navigation data, informa-
tion on various points of interest may have
changed, e.g., service stations may not be in
operation.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of gas stations is displayed.
4. Select a gas station.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance": the guidance to the
selected gas station is started.
"Add as another destination": the gas
station is included in the route.
Map display
Displaying map view
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
Overview
1 Toolbar
2 Route segment with traffic obstruction
3 Road sign for traffic obstruction
4 Planned route
5 Current location
6 Upper status box
7 Lower status box
Lines on the map
In the map view, streets and roads are depicted
with different colors and lines according to their
classification. Dotted lines represent railroad
and ferry connections. National borders are
depicted with thin lines.
Traffic obstructions
Small triangles along the planned route identify
route segments with traffic obstructions,
depending on map scale. The direction of the tri-
angles indicates the direction of the obstruction.
Road signs classify the obstructions.
> Red road sign: the obstruction relates to the
planned route or direction of travel.
> Gray road sign: the obstruction does not
relate to the planned route or direction of
travel.
Traffic information, refer to page 133.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Route guidance
132
Planned route
After route guidance is started, the planned
route is displayed on the map.
Status boxes
Show/hide: press the MINI joystick.
> Upper status box: time, phone details, and
entertainment details.
> Lower status box: symbol for active route
guidance, traffic information status, arrival
time, and distance from destination.
Toolbar
The following functions are available directly in
the map view:
Changing map scale
"Interactive map"
> Moving map: move the MINI joystick in the
corresponding direction.
> Shifting map diagonally: move the
MINI joystick in the corresponding direction
and turn the MINI joystick.
Changing scale
1. Select the symbol and press the MINI
joystick.
2. Changing scale: turn the MINI joystick.
Automatic scaling of the map
In the map view facing north, turn the
MINI joystick in either direction until the scale
AUTO is displayed. The map shows the entire
path between the location and destination..
Settings for the map display
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Settings"
> "Day/night mode"
Select and adjust depending on light
conditions. If "Traffic conditions/gray
map" is activated, then this setting is not
taken into account.
> "Traffic conditions/gray map"
The map is optimized for displaying
traffic bulletins. Symbols for the special
destinations are no longer displayed.
Displaying arrow view in map display
When route guidance is active, the arrow view
can be displayed additionally on the right side of
the map display.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Arrow display on map"
Symbol Function
Starting/stopping route
guidance
Switching voice
instructions on/off
Changing route criteria or
selecting route alternatives
Searching for special
destination
Displaying traffic bulletins
Interactive map
Adjusting map views
or arrow display
Changing scale
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Route guidance NAVIGATION
133
Destination guidance via
voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
The voice instructions can be switched on and
off during route guidance.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
Repeating a voice instruction
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the MINI joystick twice.
Adjusting volume for voice instructions
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces-
sary.
2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction to
select the desired volume.
This volume is independent of the volume of the
audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Traffic information
Overview
In many congested areas, you can receive traffic
information that is transmitted by radio stations.
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
control centers and the traffic information is
updated periodically.
During route guidance, the traffic information
relevant to the route you are planning to take is
automatically shown and taken into account in
route planning. Irrespective of whether route
guidance is active, you can have the traffic infor-
mation displayed in the map display or as an
event list.
The symbol in the toolbar of the map view
turns red if traffic information relates to the
calculated route.
Real Time Traffic Information End-User
Provisions
Certain MINI models equipped with navigation
have the capability to display real-time traffic
information. If your system has this capability
the following additional terms and conditions
apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right to use
the Traffic Data in the event that the End-User is
in material breach of the terms and conditions
contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Chan-
nel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Network")
holds the rights to the traffic incident data and
RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered.
You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other
method to reproduce, duplicate, republish,
transmit or distribute in any way any portion of
traffic incident data. You agree to indemnify,
defend and hold harmless MINI of North Amer-
ica, LLC. ("MINI NA") and Total Traffic Network,
Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all
Symbol Meaning
Voice instructions switched
on
Voice instructions switched
off
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Route guidance
134
claims, damages, costs or other expenses that
arise directly or indirectly out of (a) your unau-
thorized use of the traffic incident data or the
RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this
directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or unlaw-
ful activities by you in connection herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa-
tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total
Traffic Network, MINI NA, and their suppliers
make no representations about content, traffic
and road conditions, route usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to license
"as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network,
including, but not limited to, any and all third
party providers of any of the licensed material,
expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit-
ted by law, all warranties or representations with
respect to the licensed material (including, with-
out limitation, that the licensed material will be
error-free, will operate without interruption or
that the traffic data will be accurate), express,
implied or statutory, including, without limita-
tion, the implied warranties of merchantability,
non-infringement fitness for a particular pur-
pose, or those arising from a course of dealing or
usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor
MINI NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental
damages (including, without limitation, lost
revenues, anticipated revenues, or profits relat-
ing to the same) arising from any claim relating
directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data,
and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or
MINI NA are aware of the possibility of such
damages. These limitations apply to all claims,
including, without limitation, claims in contract
and tort (such as negligence, product liability
and strict liability). Some states do not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse-
quential damages, so those particular limita-
tions may not apply to you.
Switching reception of traffic
information on/off
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. Activate/deactivate "Receive Traffic Info".
Accessing traffic information
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
"Traffic Info": traffic information for the
surrounding area is listed here. The symbol
turns red when traffic information relate to
the calculated route.
3. "Traffic Info"
First, traffic bulletins relating to the planned
route are displayed.
The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of
their distance from the current vehicle
position.
4. Select traffic information.
"More information": display additional
information.
5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic informa-
tion if desired.
Traffic bulletins in the map
When the traffic info map is activated, the
picture on the Control Display is switched to a
grayscale. This permits an optimized depiction
of traffic information. The day/night mode is
disregarded in this setting. The symbols for the
special destinations are no longer displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Symbols in map view
The symbols of traffic obstructions are displayed
differently, depending on the scale of the map
and location of the traffic obstruction in relation
to the route.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Route guidance NAVIGATION
135
Additional information in the map
display
Depending on the map scale, the length, direc-
tion, and effects of a traffic obstruction are
depicted by traffic symbols in the map or by bars
along the planned route. The colors displayed
depend on the information sent by the traffic
information service.
> Red: traffic congestion
> Orange: stop-and-go traffic
> Yellow: heavy traffic
> Green: clear roads
> Gray: general traffic information such as
road construction
The colors displayed depend on the information
sent by the traffic information service.
Filtering of traffic bulletins
To set which traffic bulletins the system should
display:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired categories.
Traffic bulletins of the selected categories are
displayed.
> Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route
are always displayed.
> For personal safety, traffic information that
indicates a potential hazard can not be
hidden.
Route guidance with traffic information
General information
In semi-dynamic route guidance systems,
detour suggestions by the navigation system
can be added manually. In dynamic route
guidance systems, they are automatically
included in the route guidance.
Semi-dynamic route guidance
With traffic information reception switched on,
semi-dynamic route guidance is active.
The system takes into account the existing traffic
information during route guidance. A message is
displayed as a function of the route, the traffic
information, and the possible alternate routes.
When there are obstructions to traffic, an alter-
nate route is provided. The difference in dis-
tance and time between the original route and
the alternate route are also displayed.
Taking an alternate route:
"Detour"
With particular hazards, e.g. objects on the road-
way, a message is displayed without a possible
alternate route.
It is also possible to take alternate routes can
also be taken if the traffic reports are accessed
via the list:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"
Dynamic route guidance
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
> The system will not point out traffic obstruc-
tions on the original route.
> Traffic information will continue to be
displayed on the map.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Route guidance
136
> Depending on the type of road and the
nature and length of the traffic obstruction,
the route can also be calculated so that you
travel through the traffic obstruction.
> Certain hazards are displayed regardless of
the setting.
To activate dynamic route guidance:
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
What to do if… NAVIGATION
137
What to do if…
What to do if…
> The current position cannot be displayed?
The position is in an unrecognized region, in
a poor reception area, or the system is in the
process of determining the position. Recep-
tion is best when you have an unobstructed
view to the sky.
> The route guidance does not accept an
address without the street name?
A downtown area cannot be determined for
the town or city that has been entered. Input
any street in the selected town/city and start
route guidance.
> The route guidance does not accept a desti-
nation?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
> The letters for a destination cannot be
selected during destination entry?
Stored data do not contain the data of the
destination. Select a destination that is as
close as possible to the original.
> The map view is displayed in grayscale?
When the traffic info map is activated, the
picture on the Control Display is switched to
a grayscale. This permits an optimized
depiction of traffic information.
> Voice instructions are no longer issued
before intersections during route guidance?
The area has not been fully recorded yet, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new route suggestion.
> The navigation system does not react to
entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes
about 10 minutes before the system is once
again operational.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Rock Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
COMMUNICATIONS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
ENTERTAINMENT
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT On/off and tone
140
On/off and tone
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
The following audio sources have shared control
elements and setting options:
> Radio
> CD player
> External devices, e.g. MP3 player
Controls
The audio sources can be operated using:
> Buttons near the CD player
> Onboard computer
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10
Buttons near the CD player
1 Drive for audio CDs
2 Selecting waveband
3 Changing the audio source
4 Sound output for entertainment on/off,
volume
> Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on the unit, the radio
station or track set most recently is
played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
5 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
> Selecting a track.
6 Ejecting CD
Switching on/off
Entertainment audio output
Press the knob.
This symbol at the upper edge of the Control
Display indicates that the sound output is
switched off.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
On/off and tone ENTERTAINMENT
141
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob to the desired volume.
The volume can also be adjusted on the steering
wheel, refer to page 10.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use; refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
Setting tone controls
Various tone settings can be changed, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
control.
The tone settings are set for all audio sources at
once.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use; refer to Personal Profile,
page 26.
Treble, bass, balance, fader
> "Treble": treble adjustment.
> "Bass": bass adjustment.
> "Balance": volume distribution right/left.
> "Fader": volume distribution front/back.
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone setting.
4. To adjust: turn the MINI joystick.
5. To store: press the MINI joystick.
Volume levels
> "Speed volume": volume is adapted
depending on the speed
> "PDC": volume of the PDC acoustic signal
relative to the entertainment sound output
> "Gong": volume of the acoustic signal, e.g.
for the acoustic Safety Belt Reminder rela-
tive to the entertainment sound output
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
> "Microphone": volume of the microphone
during a phone conversation.
> "Loudspeak.": volume of the speaker during
a phone conversation.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT On/off and tone
142
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the MINI joystick.
6. To store: press the MINI joystick.
Resetting tone settings
All tone settings can be reset to the default
value.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
143
Radio
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
Your radio is designed for reception of the
following stations:
> FM and AM
> HD Radio
> Satellite radio
AM/FM station
Selecting a station
Press the knob if the sound output is switched
off.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
The selected station is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Changing stations
Turn and press the MINI joystick
or
Press the button for the corresponding
direction
or
Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT Radio
144
4. Select the frequency: turn the MINI joystick.
To store the station: press the MINI joystick.
Storing stations
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Press the MINI joystick.
5. Select the desired memory location.
Press and hold the MINI joystick to save a radio
station that appears in the list of stations, but is
not being listened to.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
RDS – Radio Data System
In the FM frequency range, additional informa-
tion is transmitted via RDS. If the reception con-
ditions are good, the station names are shown
on the Control Display. If the reception is weak
or disrupted, it can take some time before the
station names are displayed.
Switching the RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
HD Radio™ reception
Many radio stations transmit analog and digital
signals. If a digital radio network is available,
these stations can be received digitally and thus
with improved sound quality.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under
U.S. and Foreign Patents licensed from iBiquity
Digital Corp. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of
iBiquity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
being received digitally.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
145
When setting a station with a digital signal, it
may be a few seconds until the station is repro-
duced in digital quality.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, playback switches
between analog and digital reception. In this
case, switch off digital radio reception.
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the
artist.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
The symbol indicates that a main station also
broadcasts additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends in HD1. The
station names of the substations end in HD2,
HD3, etc.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press the MINI joystick.
3. Select the substation.
When reception is poor, the substation is muted
for several seconds.
Stored stations
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Selecting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Satellite radio
General information
The channels are offered in fixed packages.
Packages must be activated by telephone.
Navigation bar
Symbol Function
Changing list view
Selecting category
Entering channel directly
Time shift
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT Radio
146
Managing subscription
Clear reception is required for activating and
deactivating channels. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky. The
channel name is displayed in the status line.
Activating channels
The category 'Unsubscribed Channels' includes
all channels that are not activated.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the category 'Unsubscribed
Channels'.
5. Select desired channel.
The telephone number and electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Dial the telephone number to have the
channels activated.
This telephone number can also be used to
deactivate the channels.
Deactivating channels
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Manage subscription"
The telephone number and electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
5. Call Sirius to deactivate the channels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to activated channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Using the onboard computer
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired
category.
Calls up favorite selections;
opens the 'My Favorites'
category
Managing favorites
Traffic Jump
Symbol Function
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
147
4. Select desired channel.
Using the buttons near the CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The next channel is selected.
Using direct channel entry
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Set channel"
4. Turn the MINI joystick until you reach the
desired channel and then press the MINI
joystick.
Storing channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or a desired category.
4. Select desired channel.
5. Press the MINI joystick again.
6. Press the MINI joystick again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Changing list view
The list view changes each time the first symbol
on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information about the channel is displayed.
Selecting category
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the desired category.
Time shift
Approximately one hour of the channel cur-
rently being listened to is temporarily stored in
a cache memory. Prerequisite: the signal must
be available.
The stored audio track can be played back at
a different time from the live broadcast. If the
cache memory is full, then the older tracks are
recorded over. The cache memory is deleted if
a new channel is selected.
Accessing Time shift
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
Symbol Function
Channel name
Artist
Track
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT Radio
148
> The red arrow indicates the current playback
position.
> The time difference from the live broadcast
is displayed next to the cache memory bar.
> For live transmissions: "live".
Time shift menu
Automatic time shift
When the function is activated, audio playback is
stopped automatically in the event of:
> Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
> Activation of the voice activation system.
> Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
Activating
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
Deactivating
"Automatic time shift"
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Possible favorites include artist, track, game,
league, and team.
Storing artist, track, or game
Only current broadcasts can be stored as favor-
ites. The channel information must be available.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired
category.
4. Select desired channel.
5. Press the MINI joystick again.
6. Select artist, track, or game.
Storing league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"
5. Select the desired league.
6. Select "Add all teams" or a desired team.
Accessing favorites
If an activated favorite is being played, the
message "Favorite alert!" appears for approx.
20 seconds.
Select "Favorites" while the alert message is
being displayed.
Symbol Function
Go to live broadcast
Playback/pause
Next track
Previous track
Fast forward
Reverse
Automatic time shift
deactivated/activated
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
149
The displayed favorite will be played.
If it receives no notification, the system switches
into the 'My Favorites' category. All of the
favorites currently being broadcast can be
selected from a list.
Managing favorites
Activating/deactivating favorites
Favorites can be activated or deactivated
globally and individually.
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or desired favorites.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the favorites you wish to delete.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region are broadcast at intervals of a few
minutes.
Selecting region
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Activating/deactivating Jump
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Jump to:"
As soon as information about the selected
region becomes available, it is broadcast.
A new panel appears in the display.
Cancel Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius carries out an update
of the names and positions of the channels. The
update occurs automatically and can take
several minutes.
Notes
> Under some circumstances, reception may
not be possible, e.g. under certain environ-
mental or topographical conditions. The
satellite radio has no influence on this.
> The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages or near trees, moun-
tains, or other powerful sources of radio
interference.
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast
soon.
Information is currently being
broadcast.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT CD player
150
CD player
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
Inserting CD
Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side
up. Die CD is automatically pulled in.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is on. For CDs with compressed audio files, it
can take several minutes to the data, depending
on the folder structure.
Playable formats
CD player
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA
> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC
Ejecting CD
Press the button on the CD player.
The CD will be slid a short distance out from the
drive.
Audio playback
Selecting the track using the button
Press the button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
Selecting the track using the onboard
computer
Audio CDs
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD"
3. Select the desired track. Press the
MINI joystick to start playback.
CDs with compressed audio files
Depending on the data, it is possible that not all
indications on the CD will be correctly displayed.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD"
3. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the MINI joystick to the left.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
CD player ENTERTAINMENT
151
4. Select a track and press the MINI joystick.
Displaying information about the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks on the CD
> File name for the track.
Random play sequence
The tracks on the current CD are played once
each in random order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD"
3. Select the desired CD.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Random"
Switch off random play sequence: press the
MINI joystick.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Automatic replay
Selected tracks, folders, or CDs are automatically
repeated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT External devices
152
External devices
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Overview
Different external devices can be connected to
the vehicle. Sound is output over the vehicle
speakers. Depending upon how the external
device is connected to the vehicle, the device
may be operated using the MINI joystick.
AUX-In connection
Overview
> It is possible to connect audio devices, e.g.
MP3 players. Sound is output over the
vehicle speakers.
> Recommended settings: mid-level tone and
volume settings on the audio device. Tone
may depend on the quality of the audio files.
Connecting
1 USB interface
2 Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8''/3.5 mm
For audio playback over the vehicle speakers,
connect the headphones or line-out connection
of the device to the AUX-In connection 2.
Starting audio playback
The audio device must be switched on.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices" if applicable
3. "AUX front"
Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Volume
The volume of the sound output depends on the
audio device. If this volume greatly deviates
from the other audio sources, then the volume
should be equalized.
Symbol Meaning
USB audio interface
Music interface for smartphones
Bluetooth audio
AUX-In connection
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
External devices ENTERTAINMENT
153
Adjusting volume
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices" if applicable
3. "AUX front"
4. "Volume"
5. Turn MINI joystick until the desired volume
is set and then press the MINI joystick.
USB audio interface/Music
interface for
smartphones
Overview
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They are operated using the onboard computer.
Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
Options for connecting external devices
> Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
devices, USB devices such as MP3 players,
USB memory sticks, or mobile phones that
are supported by the USB audio interface.
> Connection via snap-in adapter if the vehicle
is equipped with a music interface for smart-
phones: Apple iPhone or mobile phones.
Because of the large number of audio devices
available on the market, an operation via the
vehicle cannot be guaranteed for every audio
device/mobile phone.
Ask your MINI dealer for suitable audio devices/
mobile phones.
File systems
Popular file systems for USB devices are
supported. The manufacturer of your MINI
recommends the FAT 32 format.
Audio files
Playback of standard audio files is possible,
depending on the vehicle equipment:
> MP3
> WMA
> WAV (PCM)
> AAC, M4A
> Without voice activation system: Playback
lists: M3U
> With voice activation system: Playback lists:
M3U, WPL, PLS
Video files
Playback of standard video files with a
compatible Apple device is possible:
> MPEG4
> H.264
Connecting via the USB audio interface
1 USB interface
2 AV-In connection for audio/video playback:
TRS connector 1/8''/3.5 mm
Apple device
A special adapter cable is available for connect-
ing the Apple device. The adapter cable is
required for a proper connection.
Further information:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT External devices
154
> At: www.mini.com/connectivity
> At your MINI dealer.
For audio playback over the vehicle speakers,
connect the Apple device using the special
adapter cable with AV-In connection 2 and USB
interface 1 or using a flexible adapter cable with
a USB interface 1.
The USB audio interface supports the menu
structure of the Apple device.
USB device
To protect the USB interface and USB device
from mechanical damage, connect them with
a flexible adapter cable.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface 1.
After initial connection
Track information, e.g. artist or music style and
the playlists of the USB device are imported into
the vehicle. This process can take some time.
The time required is dependent on the USB
device and on the number of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be accessed
via the file directory.
Number of tracks
The data from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 26,000 tracks can be stored in the
vehicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more
than 26,000 tracks are stored, then the data of
existing tracks may be deleted.
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights
Management (DRM) cannot be played.
Audio playback
Starting audio playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol and press the
MINI joystick.
Playback begins with the first track.
Track search
Selection is possible via:
> Playback lists
> Information: music style, artist; if applicable,
composer, album, track.
> Additionally for USB devices: file directory; if
applicable, composer.
Track titles are displayed if they have been
stored in the Latin alphabet.
Starting the track search
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. Select desired category, e.g. "Genre",
"Artist".
All entries are displayed in a list.
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the desired
input. When a letter is entered, the
results are filtered using this letter as the
first letter. If multiple letters are entered,
all results that contain that sequence are
displayed.
> Select the desired entry from the list.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
External devices ENTERTAINMENT
155
5. Select additional categories if desired.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist
are to be displayed, call up that artist only.
All of the tracks by that artist are then dis-
played.
6. "Play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Playback lists
To open playback lists.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Random play sequence
The current list of tracks is played in random
sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the steering wheel or CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Video playback
Overview
Video playback is only possible with an iPod/
iPhone. To connect, use a video adapter cable or
possibly a snap-in adapter.
Playback
The video image on the onboard computer is
displayed when the vehicle is standing still; in
some countries only when the hand brake is
engaged or if the transmission is set on P.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol and press the
MINI joystick.
4. "Video"
5. Select the desired file.
Select category in file directory, if applicable.
6. Press the MINI joystick.
The playback of the selected video file is
started.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT External devices
156
Notes
Do not subject the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
extremely high temperatures, refer to the
operating instructions for the audio device.
Otherwise the audio device may be damaged,
impairing driving safety while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s,
proper playback cannot always be ensured.
Audio and video playback from using a snap-in
adapter may only be possible if a there is no
cable connected to the AV-In connector.
Information on connection
> The connected audio device is supplied with
a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the
device. Therefore, do not connect the device
to the power socket in the vehicle.
> Do not use force when plugging the connec-
tor into the USB interface.
> Do not connect any devices, e.g. fans or
lamps, to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard drives.
> Do not use the USB audio interface to
recharge external devices.
Bluetooth audio
Overview
> It is possible to use Bluetooth to play music
files from external devices, e.g. audio
devices or mobile phones.
> Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
> Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
> The volume of the sound output depends on
the device. If necessary, change the volume
setting on the device.
> Up to four external devices can be paired
with the vehicle.
Requirements
> Suitable device. Information is available at
www.mini.com/connectivity.
> Device operational.
> Ignition switched on.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 174, and in the device.
> Bluetooth presets in the device are required,
e.g. connection not confirmed or visible,
refer to Owner's Manual for the device.
> A number with at least 4 and at most
16 digits has been established as the
Bluetooth passkey. Only required once for
pairing.
Pairing and connecting
Only pair the device when the vehicle is
stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead
to endangerment of passengers or other road
users.<
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is
displayed.
5. To perform other operations on the device,
refer to the operating instructions for the
device: e.g. search for and connect
Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the device's display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
External devices ENTERTAINMENT
157
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the device's display.
The onboard computer or the device will
prompt you to enter the same Bluetooth
passkey.
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
8. Select desired functions with which the
device is to be connected, e.g. "Audio".
9. "OK"
If the pairing was successful, the device is
displayed as connected.
symbol displayed in white: device is active as
an audio source.
If the pairing was not successful: What to do if…,
refer to page 158.
Connecting a particular device
A device that has already been paired can be
connected as an active audio source.
Connection is not possible if a data exchange is
currently taking place via a mobile phone that is
connected via Bluetooth.
Prerequisite
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired
devices.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
7. Activate "Audio".
8. "OK"
Connecting a device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
symbol displayed in white: device is active as
an audio source.
Playback
General information
> The display of track information depends on
the device.
> Operation via the device or the onboard
computer are both possible.
> Playback is interrupted if a data exchange
takes place via a mobile phone that is
connected via Bluetooth.
Starting playback
1. Connect device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "External devices"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT External devices
158
4. Select the symbol.
5. Select the desired track from the list.
Playback menu
Depending on the device, all functions may not
be available.
Track search
Depending on the device, it is possible to search
by track.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Search device content"
5. "A-Z search"
6. Select desired entry or directory.
Player program
Depending on the device, there may be various
programs for playing music files.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Select player"
6. Select the desired program.
Disconnecting an audio connection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. Select the desired device from the list of
connected devices.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. Deactivate "Audio".
7. "OK"
With a mobile phone, only the audio connection
is disconnected. All other connections remain
active.
Unpairing device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. Highlight the device to be unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if…
Information about suitable devices is available
at www.mini.com/connectivity.
Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 173.
Device not supported by vehicle.
> If necessary, carry out a software update,
refer to page 159.
Symbol Function
Next track
Fast forward: press and hold the
symbol.
Previous track
Reverse: press and hold the
symbol.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
External devices ENTERTAINMENT
159
Device could not be paired or connected.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
and vehicle match? Enter the same passkey
on the device and via the onboard com-
puter.
> A multi-digit passkey may be required.
> Is the passkey input taking longer than
30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the device or to the vehicle? If necessary,
delete the connections with other devices.
> Is the mobile phone in power economy
mode or does it only have a small amount of
battery charge remaining? Charge the
mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a
charging cable.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only
be possible to connect one device to the
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
the vehicle and only pair and connect one
device.
> Is the device no longer responding? Switch
the device off and back on again.
> Repeat the pairing procedure.
No music can be played.
> Start the program for playing music files on
the device and if necessary, select a track via
the device.
> Activate and deactivate the radio mute on
the radio control panel.
Music files only play quietly.
> Adjust volume settings on the device.
Videos cannot be played or can only be played
with a delayed audio output.
> Check the device compatibility. Information
is available at www.mini.com/connectivity.
Playback is interrupted by the press of a button
or other messages on the device.
> Switch off key tones and other acoustic
signal on the device.
Playback is interrupted by a phone call or traffic
report and does not automatically continue.
> Activate and deactivate the radio mute on
the radio control panel.
Playback is not possible when the mobile phone
is connected via Bluetooth audio and at the
same time via the music interface for smart-
phones at the snap-in adapter.
> Disconnect one of the two connections, e.g.
the audio connection, refer to page 158,
and start playback again.
If you have gone through all items in the list and
still cannot activate the desired function please
contact the Hotline or your MINI dealer.
Software update
The vehicle supports various external devices,
depending on the software it is currently using.
A software update can enable the vehicle to
support, for example, new mobile phones or
new external devices.
Software updates and associated, up-to-date
instructions are available on the web page
www.mini.com/connectivity.
Displaying current version
The currently installed software is displayed.
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Show current version"
Select the desired version to display additional
information.
Updating software
The software update can only be performed
when stopped.
1. Save the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB data storage device.
2. Connect the USB data storage device to the
USB port in the center console, refer to
page 153. Updating using the USB port in
the glove compartment is not possible.
3. "Settings"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT External devices
160
4. "Software update"
5. "Update software"
6. "Start update"
7. "OK"
All of the listed software updates are installed.
Reinstalling previous version
The software version before the last software
update can be restored.
The restoring to the previous version can only be
performed when stopped.
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Restore previous version"
4. Select "OK" twice.
All of the listed software updates are removed.
Note
MINI Connected, Office functions, and con-
nected devices may temporarily be unavailable
during a software update or while restoring to
the previous version. Wait a few minutes until
the functions are available once more.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
External devices ENTERTAINMENT
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Connect Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
COMMUNICATIONS
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS Hands-free device Bluetooth
164
Hands-free device Bluetooth
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Overview
The concept
Mobile phones can be connected to the vehicle
through Bluetooth.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
After being paired once, when the ignition is
switched on, these devices are automatically
detected as soon as they are present in the
vehicle and can be controlled via the onboard
computer, the buttons on the steering wheel,
and by voice.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired.
It may be necessary for some functions to be
activated by the mobile phone provider.
Only make entries when traffic conditions
permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in
your hand while you are driving; use the hands-
free system instead. If you do not observe this
precaution, your being distracted can endanger
vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Precise information as to which mobile phones
are supported by the hands-free device can be
found at www.mini.com/connectivity.
With a certain software version, these suitable
mobile phones support the vehicle functions
described below.
With other mobile phones or software versions,
malfunctions may occur.
A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle
should not be operated via the mobile phone
keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
Displaying vehicle identification number
and software part number
To check which mobile phones are supported by
the hands-free device, the vehicle identification
number and the software part number will be
required. The software version of the mobile
phone may also be required.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information"
Notes
Do not expose your mobile phone to extreme
ambient conditions, for example, very high tem-
peratures; otherwise, functions on your mobile
phone may not work. Follow the operating
instructions for your mobile phone.
Pairing/unpairing mobile
phone
Requirements
> Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 164.
> Mobile phone operational.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 165, and in the mobile phone.
> Bluetooth presets in the mobile phone are
required, e.g. connection not confirmed or
visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the
mobile phone.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Hands-free device Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS
165
> A number with at least 4 and at most
16 digits has been established as the
Bluetooth passkey. Only required once for
pairing.
> Radio readiness switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth®"
Pairing and connecting
Only pair the mobile phone when the
vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention
may lead to endangerment of passengers or
other road users.<
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is
displayed.
4. To perform other operations on the mobile
phone, refer to the Owner's Manual for the
mobile phone: e.g. search for and connect
Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
6. The onboard computer or the mobile phone
will prompt you to enter the same Bluetooth
passkey.
Enter the passkey and confirm.
or
Compare the control number on the vehicle
display with the control number on the
mobile phone display. Confirm the control
number in the mobile phone and in the
vehicle.
"OK"
7. Select the functions that are to be used for
the mobile phone.
8. "OK"
9. Move the MINI joystick to the left.
If pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
If the pairing was not successful: What to do if…,
refer to page 166.
Following the initial pairing
> The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or radio readi-
ness is switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS Hands-free device Bluetooth
166
> After identification, phone book entries are
imported from the mobile phone and/or SIM
card of the telephone, depending on the
telephone.
> Four mobile phones can be paired.
> Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a
secure connection, refer to the Owner's
Manual for the mobile phone.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired mobile phones are listed.
3. Select the mobile phone to be connected.
Unpairing mobile phone
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired mobile phones are listed.
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if…
For information on suitable mobile phones, refer
to page 164.
The mobile phone could not be paired or
connected.
> Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
vehicle and in the mobile phone.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
the onboard computer.
> A multi-digit passkey may be required.
> Is the passkey input taking longer than
30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con-
nections with other devices on the mobile
phone.
> Is the mobile phone in power economy
mode or does it only have a small amount of
battery charge remaining? Charge the
mobile phone using a charging cable.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only
be possible to connect one device to the
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
the vehicle and only pair and connect one
device.
> Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
Switch the mobile phone off and back on
again. Repeat the pairing procedure.
Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
> Switch the mobile phone off and back on
again. Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Is the ambient temperature too high or too
low? Do not subject your mobile phone to
extreme ambient temperatures.
Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of
them are displayed, or they are displayed
incompletely.
> The transfer of phone book entries has not
yet completed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Hands-free device Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS
167
> It is possible that only the phone book
entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transferred.
> It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
> The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
> Is the amount of data for the contact too
large, e.g., because of stored information
such as addresses? Reduce the number of
data entries.
The telephone connection quality is low.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi-
ble to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth
signal.
> Place mobile phone in the area of the center
console.
If you have gone through all items in the list and
still cannot activate the desired function please
contact the Hotline or your MINI dealer.
Operation
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is
reached.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
book and is transmitted by the network, then
the name and number of the contact are dis-
played; otherwise, only the number is displayed.
If a contact is assigned more than one phone
number, then only the name of the caller is
transmitted.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The caller is redirected to the mailbox if it has
been activated.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
1. "Telephone"
2. "End call"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS Hands-free device Bluetooth
168
Entering phone numbers
Dialing a number
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select the symbol.
Calls with multiple parties
General information
It is possible to switch between two calls and to
connect two calls to form a conference call.
These functions must be supported by the
mobile phone and by the service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function may have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone may
need to be adjusted for this.
When a second call comes in during an ongoing
call, a call-waiting signal sounds.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put on
hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish another call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
"Return"
The conversion that was on hold is continued.
Switching between two calls, toggling
Active call: highlighted.
The call on hold is identified with:
"on hold...".
Select the symbol to switch to the call on
hold.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele-
phone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
Both calls are always ended when a conference
call is terminated. If one call is terminated by
another party, the other call can be continued.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Hands-free device Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS
169
Keypad dialing
Use keypad dialing to gain access to network
services or to control devices, e.g. to remotely
access an answering machine. This requires the
DTMF code.
1. "Telephone"
2. Select contact from a list or
"Dial number"
3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Enter the DTMF code via the onboard
computer.
For a conference call in progress, DTMF dialing is
not possible.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts of the
telephone and shows all contacts for which a
phone number is entered. The entries can be
selected to make a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts, refer to page 171.
Calling a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
Select the symbol. Contact with one
phone number. The connection is estab-
lished.
2. Select the symbol. Contact with more than
one phone number. Select phone number,
the connection is established.
Call not possible, the mobile phone has no
reception or network.
Editing a contact
Changing entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the telephone are
transferred to the vehicle, depending on the
mobile phone. The last 20 phone numbers
dialed are displayed. The sorting of the phone
numbers depends on the mobile phone.
Selecting the number using the onboard
computer
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS Hands-free device Bluetooth
170
3. Select the desired entry and phone number,
if necessary.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
Deleting entries depends upon the mobile
phone.
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact" if necessary
Received calls
Displaying calls
The list of received calls in the telephone is
transferred into the vehicle, depending on the
mobile phone. The last 20 calls received are
displayed. The sorting and displaying of phone
numbers depends on the mobile phone.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Select an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
Deleting entries depends upon the mobile
phone.
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact" if necessary
Hands-free system
General information
Calls being conducted using the hands-free
system can be continued using the mobile
phone and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that have been initiated from outside the
Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued
using the hands-free system if the ignition is
switched on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the call is
automatically switched to hands-free mode.
If the switch does not occur automatically, then
follow the instructions that appear on the dis-
play of the mobile phone, also refer to the
Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Hands-free device Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS
171
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
Calls being conducted using the hands-free
system can also be continued using the mobile
phone if so desired, depending on the mobile
phone.
At this point, follow the instructions that appear
on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to
the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.
Contacts
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The
addresses can be used as destinations for
navigation.
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. If input boxes are already filled with previous
entries: "Delete input fields"
4. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
5. Input text, refer to page 20.
When equipped with a navigation system:
enter address. It is only possible to enter
addresses that are contained in the naviga-
tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures
that route guidance is possible for all
addresses.
6. "Store" if necessary
7. "Store contact in vehicle"
Defining a home address
It is possible to store a home address. It is listed
at the beginning of the contacts.
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
My contacts
General information
Listing all contacts from the vehicle.
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
2. "My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS Hands-free device Bluetooth
172
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entry.
4. Move the MINI joystick to the left.
5. "Yes"
If a contact that comes from the mobile phone is
edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile
phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the
vehicle, and only this copy is displayed. Under
certain conditions, an identical contact entry is
generated.
Selecting a contact as a destination
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina-
tion"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used in route guidance
must correspond to the navigation data stored
in the vehicle. The address can be checked to
ensure this.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
Selecting name sorting
Names can be displayed in different orders.
1. "My contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored in
the mobile phone, the sorting of names can
differ from the sorting selected.
Deleting contacts
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a
destination.
Mobile phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS
173
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Overview
The concept
Mobile phones or other external devices, e.g.
audio players, can be connected to the vehicle
via Bluetooth.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
After being paired once, when the ignition is
switched on, these devices are automatically
detected as soon as they are present in the
vehicle and can be controlled via the onboard
computer, the buttons on the steering wheel,
and by voice.
Depending on whether they are functioning as a
telephone and/or as an audio source, external
devices can be used via the vehicle. The tele-
phone functions will be described below. Oper-
ation of audio functions, refer to page 156.
It may be necessary for some functions to be
activated by the mobile phone provider.
Only make entries when traffic conditions
permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in
your hand while you are driving; use the hands-
free system instead. If you do not observe this
precaution, your being distracted can endanger
vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Snap-in adapter
The snap-in adapter, refer to page 182, makes it
possible to:
> Accommodate the mobile phone.
> Recharge its battery.
> Connect it to an external antenna of the
vehicle.
This assures a better network connection
and constant sound quality.
A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle
should not be operated via the mobile phone
keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
Suitable mobile phones
For precise information as to which mobile
phones and external devices with Bluetooth
interfaces are supported by the mobile phone
preparation package, go to www.mini.com/
connectivity.
With a certain software version, these suitable
mobile phones support the vehicle functions
described below.
With other mobile phones or software versions,
malfunctions may occur.
It is possible to perform a software update, refer
to page 159.
Displaying vehicle identification number
and software part number
Checking which mobile phones are supported
by the mobile phone preparation requires the
vehicle identification number and software part
number. The software version of the mobile
phone may also be required.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information"
Notes
Do not expose your mobile phone to extreme
ambient conditions, for example, very high tem-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
174
peratures; otherwise, functions on your mobile
phone may not work. Follow the operating
instructions for your mobile phone.
Pairing/unpairing mobile
phone
Overview
> Using a mobile phone as a telephone.
> Using the mobile phone as an auxiliary
phone.
> Using a mobile phone as an audio source.
> Using an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 156.
Functions supported by the mobile phone and
audio device are displayed as symbols during
the pairing.
White symbol: function active.
Gray symbol: function inactive.
Up to four external devices can be paired. Two
devices can be connected to the vehicle at a
time and used for different functions. The phone
can be used to perform all of the following
phone functions.
Requirements
> Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 173.
> Mobile phone operational.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 174, and in the mobile phone.
> Bluetooth presets in the mobile phone are
required, e.g. connection not confirmed or
visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the
mobile phone.
> If necessary, deactivate the audio connec-
tion, refer to page 174.
> A number with at least 4 and at most
16 digits has been established as the
Bluetooth passkey. Only required once for
pairing.
> Ignition switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating additional
functions
To use these functions in the vehicle, activate
them before pairing. For information on suitable
mobile phones that support this function, refer
to page 173.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. Select desired additional function.
Bluetooth audio
Use a mobile phone as a telephone and as an
audio device in the vehicle.
"Bluetooth® audio"
Symbol Function
Telephone
Auxiliary phone
Audio source
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS
175
To use a mobile phone exclusively as a tele-
phone in the vehicle, deactivate the function
and reconnect the mobile phone.
Office
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text
messages, and e-mails are imported from the
mobile phone into the vehicle.
"Office"
Auxiliary phone
Another mobile phone can be used as an
auxiliary phone.
"Additional telephone"
Incoming calls to the auxiliary phone can be
accepted, refer to page 178. Missed calls to the
auxiliary phone are shown in the Control
Display.
Pairing and connecting
Only pair the mobile phone when the
vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention
may lead to endangerment of passengers or
other road users.<
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is
displayed.
4. To perform other operations on the mobile
phone, refer to the Owner's Manual for the
mobile phone: e.g. search for and connect
Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
6. The onboard computer or the mobile phone
will prompt you to enter the same Bluetooth
passkey.
Enter the passkey and confirm.
or
Compare the control number on the vehicle
display with the control number on the
mobile phone display. Confirm the control
number in the mobile phone and in the
vehicle.
"OK"
7. Select the functions that are to be used for
the mobile phone.
8. "OK"
9. Move the MINI joystick to the left.
If pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
If the pairing was not successful: What to do if…,
refer to page 177.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
176
Following the initial pairing
> The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or radio readi-
ness is switched on.
> After identification, phone book entries are
imported from the mobile phone and/or SIM
card of the telephone, depending on the
telephone.
> Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a
secure connection, refer to the Owner's
Manual for the mobile phone.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired mobile phones are listed.
3. Select the mobile phone to be connected.
The assigned functions before the unpairing of
the mobile phone are assigned to the mobile
phone when it is reconnected. If a mobile phone
is already connected, then these functions are
deactivated if necessary.
Device options
Device options in devices that are paired and
connected can be activated or deactivated.
Configuring device
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the device to be configured.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. Activate/deactivate functions. At least one
function must be selected.
> "Telephone"
> "Additional telephone"
> "Audio"
7. "OK"
If a device is assigned a function, this may
deactivate the function in an already connected
device and cause the other device to be
unpaired.
Exchanging the telephone and auxiliary
phone
If the telephone and auxiliary phone are
connected to the vehicle, the function can be
swapped between the two devices.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Using the mobile phone as an audio
source
Using the audio-capable mobile phone as an
audio source. Activate Bluetooth audio, refer to
page 174.
Activate and connect the mobile phone in
vehicle, refer to page 175.
The mobile phone is used as an audio source if
no other device is connected as an audio source.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS
177
If a device is already connected as an audio
source:
1. Activate and connect the mobile phone in
vehicle, refer to page 175.
2. "Use for audio"
The mobile phone is connected as an audio
source. The previous audio source is no
longer connected to the vehicle.
Unpairing device
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired mobile phones are listed.
3. Highlight the device to be unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if…
For information on suitable mobile phones, refer
to page 173.
The mobile phone could not be paired or
connected.
> Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
vehicle and in the mobile phone.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
the onboard computer.
> A multi-digit passkey may be required.
> Is the passkey input taking longer than
30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con-
nections with other devices on the mobile
phone.
> Is the audio connection activated? Deacti-
vate the audio connection.
> Is the mobile phone in power economy
mode or does it only have a small amount of
battery charge remaining? Charge the
mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a
charging cable.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only
be possible to connect one device to the
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
the vehicle and only pair and connect one
device.
> Telephone functions not possible.
> Is the mobile phone paired as an auxiliary
phone and is the auxiliary phone function
deactivated? Activate the function.
> Outgoing call not possible? Connect the
mobile phone as a telephone.
Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
> Switch the mobile phone off and back on
again. Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Is the ambient temperature too high or too
low? Do not subject your mobile phone to
extreme ambient temperatures.
Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of
them are displayed, or they are displayed
incompletely.
> The transfer of phone book entries has not
yet completed.
> It is possible that only the phone book
entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transferred.
> It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
> The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
> The data volume of the phone book entry is
too great, e.g. due to additionally stored
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
178
information such as notes? Reduce the data
volume.
> Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source or auxiliary phone? The mobile
phone must be connected as a telephone.
The telephone connection quality is low.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi-
ble to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth
signal.
> Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the vicinity of the
center console.
> Adjust the volume of the microphone and
speaker separately.
If you have gone through all items in the list and
still cannot activate the desired function please
contact the Hotline or your MINI dealer.
Operation
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is
reached.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
the microphone on the mobile phone and the
volume of the person on the phone with you.
Depending on the mobile phone, it may be
necessary to adjust the volumes.
Adjustments are only possible during a call and
must be carried out separately for each phone.
When the telephone is unpaired, this deletes the
settings.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. To select the desired setting:
"Microphone" or "Loudspeak."
5. To adjust: turn the MINI joystick.
6. To store: press the MINI joystick.
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
book and is transmitted by the network, then
the name and number of the contact are dis-
played; otherwise, only the number is displayed.
If a contact is assigned more than one phone
number, then only the name of the caller is
transmitted.
With calls to the auxiliary phone, only the
number is displayed if it is transmitted by the
network.
An incoming call on a phone will be rejected
automatically when a call is active on the other
phone.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The caller is redirected to the mailbox if it has
been activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS
179
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
1. "Telephone"
2. "End call"
Entering phone numbers
Dialing a number
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select the symbol.
It is also possible to enter phone numbers by
voice.
Calls with multiple parties
General information
It is possible to switch between two calls and to
connect two calls to form a conference call.
These functions must be supported by the
mobile phone and by the service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function may have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone may
need to be adjusted for this.
When a second call comes in during an ongoing
call, a call-waiting signal sounds.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put on
hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish another call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
Switching between two calls, toggling
Active call: highlighted.
The call on hold is identified with:
"on hold...".
Select the symbol to switch to the call on
hold.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele-
phone conference call.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
180
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
Both calls are always ended when a conference
call is terminated. If one call is terminated by
another party, the other call can be continued.
Muting the microphone
The microphone can be muted in active calls.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Microphone mute"
The muted microphone is automatically
activated:
> If a new call is made.
> When switching between callers on hold.
Keypad dialing
Use keypad dialing to gain access to network
services or to control devices, e.g. to remotely
access an answering machine. This requires the
DTMF code.
1. "Telephone"
2. Select contact from a list or
"Dial number"
3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Enter the DTMF code via the onboard
computer.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts of the
telephone and shows all contacts for which a
phone number is entered. The entries can be
selected to make a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts, refer to page 185.
Calling a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
Select the symbol. Contact with one
phone number. The connection is estab-
lished.
2. Select the symbol. Contact with more than
one phone number. Select phone number,
the connection is established.
Call not possible, the mobile phone has no
reception or network.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS
181
Editing a contact
Changing entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the telephone are
transferred to the vehicle, depending on the
mobile phone. The last 20 phone numbers
dialed are displayed. The sorting of the phone
numbers depends on the mobile phone.
Selecting the number using the onboard
computer
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry and phone number,
if necessary.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
Deleting entries depends upon the mobile
phone.
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact" if necessary
Received calls
Displaying calls
The list of received calls in the telephone is
transferred into the vehicle, depending on the
mobile phone. The last 20 calls received are
displayed. The sorting and displaying of phone
numbers depends on the mobile phone.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Select an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
Deleting entries depends upon the mobile
phone.
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
182
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact" if necessary
Hands-free system
General information
Calls being conducted using the hands-free
system can be continued using the mobile
phone and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that have been initiated from outside the
Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued
using the hands-free system if the ignition is
switched on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the call is
automatically switched to hands-free mode.
If the switch does not occur automatically, then
follow the instructions that appear on the
display of the mobile phone, also refer to the
Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
Calls being conducted using the hands-free
system can also be continued using the mobile
phone if so desired, depending on the mobile
phone.
At this point, follow the instructions that appear
on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to
the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.
Snap-in adapter
The concept
The snap-in adapter makes it possible to do the
following:
> Accommodate the mobile phone.
> Recharge its battery.
> Connect to the outside antenna of the
vehicle.
This assures a better network connection
and constant sound quality.
General information
For detailed information on snap-in adapters
that compatibly support mobile phone func-
tions, please contact your MINI dealer.
Do not expose your mobile phone to extreme
ambient conditions, for example, very high
temperatures; otherwise, functions on your
mobile phone may not work. Follow the
operating instructions for your mobile phone.
Installation location
In the center armrest.
Inserting snap-in adapter
1. Press the button and remove the cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS
183
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front,
arrow 1, and press downward, arrow 2, until
it clicks into place.
Inserting mobile phone
1. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be
necessary to remove the protective cap of
the antenna connector and from the USB
connection of the mobile phone.
2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons
facing upward toward the electrical connec-
tions and press down until it engages.
Removing mobile phone
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS Office
184
Office
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Overview
General information
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text
messages and mobile phone e-mails can be
displayed using the Control Display if the mobile
phone compatibly supports these functions and
the required Bluetooth radio standards.
For information about which mobile phones and
functions are available, go to www.mini.com/
connectivity.
A limited number of compatible mobile phones
are available for Office.
Contents are only displayed completely when
the vehicle is stopped.
Only read access to the mobile phone is
possible.
Do not use Office while driving. Make
entries only when traffic and road condi-
tions permit; otherwise, you may endanger
vehicle occupants and other road users by being
distracted.<
Requirements
> A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, the data access to the mobile
phone must be confirmed.
> Time zones, time, and date, refer to
page 73, are correctly adjusted on the
Control Display and on the mobile phone in
order, for example, to correctly display
appointments.
Updating
Every time that the mobile phone is connected
to the vehicle, data are updated. Appointments,
tasks, notes and reminders can be updated
separately.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
"Notes" or "Reminders"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Update data"
Data from the mobile phone are again trans-
ferred to the vehicle.
Current office
The number of unread messages and active
tasks as well as upcoming appointments are
displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office"
3. Select the desired entry to display details.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Office COMMUNICATIONS
185
Contacts
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The
contacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be used as destina-
tions for navigation and the phone numbers can
be dialed.
Displaying contacts
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entry.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
If a contact is changed, the changes are not
stored in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry
is stored in the vehicle, and only this copy is
displayed.
Selecting a contact as a destination
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select address.
With contacts from the mobile phone, the
address must be compared with the naviga-
tion data stored in the vehicle. In this case:
Correct the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina-
tion"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used in route guidance
must correspond to the navigation data stored
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a
destination.
Mobile phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS Office
186
in the vehicle. The address can be checked to
ensure this.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of
it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone.
New contact
A contact can be associated with up to 8 phone
numbers, 2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses, and
one Internet address.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "New contact"
5. If input boxes are already filled with previous
entries: "Delete input fields"
6. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
7. Enter text and assign a contact type, refer to
page 186.
8. When equipped with a navigation system:
enter address. It is only possible to enter
addresses that are contained in the naviga-
tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures
that route guidance is possible for all
addresses.
9. "Accept address" if necessary
10. "Store contact in vehicle"
Contact types
Phone numbers and addresses can be assigned
various contact types.
Defining a home address
It is possible to store a home address. It is listed
at the beginning of the contacts.
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting name sorting
Names can be displayed in different orders.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored in
the mobile phone, the sorting of names can
differ from the sorting selected.
Displaying contact pictures
Pictures stored with contacts are stored in the
vehicle when the mobile phone is connected to
the vehicle. The number of pictures transmitted
depends on the mobile phone. The mobile
phone must support this function.
Symbol Meaning
Private phone number
Business phone number
Mobile phone number
Other phone number
Private address
Business address
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Office COMMUNICATIONS
187
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. "Show images"
The display of all contact pictures is activated or
deactivated.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
cannot be deleted.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
4. "Options"
5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Messages
General information
The displaying of text messages and e-mails
depends on whether the mobile phone supports
transmission to the vehicle. Text messages and
e-mails may not be supported by the service
provider or the function may have to be sepa-
rately activated. After a mobile phone is paired
for the first time, the transmission may take
several minutes. Messages are only displayed
completely when the vehicle is stopped.
Messages from the auxiliary phone are not
transmitted.
Displaying messages
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
Message type
A symbol indicates the type of message.
Read message.
Unread message.
Filtering message lists
A message list can be filtered if there is more
than one message type.
1. "Filter:"
2. Select message type.
> "All"
All messages are displayed.
> "Text message"
Only text messages from mobile phones
are displayed.
> "E-mail"
Only text messages from mobile phones
are displayed.
Text message
Calling a text message sender
1. Select the desired message.
2. Select the symbol.
Saving sender in the contacts
1. Highlight the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be stored
or selected, see page 190.
Reading text messages aloud
Reading text messages aloud, refer to page 190.
Symbol Message type
Text message
E-mail from mobile phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS Office
188
E-mail
Displaying e-mail
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
Displaying e-mail contacts
If the sender and receiver of an e-mail were
transmitted from a mobile phone, they will be
displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail address is stored in the contacts,
then the contact is displayed. Select contact to
display details.
If the e-mail address is not stored in the con-
tacts, then it may be that only the e-mail address
is displayed.
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be stored
or selected, see page 190.
Deactivating entire display
When opening an e-mail when in the vehicle, it
is completely transferred to the vehicle. This
may result in charges.
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Fully download e-mails"
Only a part of an e-mail from a mobile
phone is loaded into the vehicle.
Reading e-mail
Reading e-mail, see page 190.
Calendar
Displaying calendar
Appointments from the last 20 days and the
next 50 days can be displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Calendar"
Appointments of the current day are
displayed.
Selecting calendar day
1. Select date.
2. Select desired day or date.
> "Next day"
> "Date:"
> "Previous day"
> "Today"
Displaying appointment
1. Select the desired appointment.
2. To scroll through appointment, if necessary:
> Turn the MINI joystick.
> Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be stored
or selected, see page 190.
Reading an appointment aloud
Reading an appointment aloud, refer to
page 190.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Office COMMUNICATIONS
189
Tasks
Displaying task list
Display open tasks that must be completed
within the next 90 days.
1. "Office"
2. "Tasks"
Sorting task list
1. Select the top line in the task list.
2. To select sorting criterion:
> "Priority (!)"
> "Subject"
> "Due date"
Displaying task
1. Select the desired task.
2. To scroll through the task, if necessary:
> Turn the MINI joystick.
> Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be stored
or selected, see page 190.
Reading a task aloud
Reading a task aloud, refer to page 190.
Notes
Displaying notes
1. "Office"
2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Displaying a note
1. Select the desired note.
2. To scroll through the note, if necessary:
> Turn the MINI joystick.
> Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be stored
or selected, see page 190.
Reading a note aloud
Reading a note aloud, refer to page 190.
Reminders
Displaying reminders
Reminders for imminent appointments and
tasks are displayed. After an appointment has
passed or a task is due, the reminder is deleted.
1. "Office"
2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
The associated appointment or task is displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS Office
190
Using contact data
Overview
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be stored
or selected.
Displaying a contact or dialing a phone
number
1. "Use contact data"
2. To display a contact or dial a phone number:
> Select a contact to display a detailed view
of the contact.
> Select a phone number to directly
establish a connection.
Storing contact data
1. "Use contact data"
2. Highlight a phone number or e-mail
address.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading aloud
Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries,
tasks, and notes can be read aloud to you.
1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task, or note.
2. Select the symbol.
While the message is being read aloud, you have
the following options:
> "Pause"
Interrupt the reading. Select again to
resume the reading.
> "Back to beginning"
Read message again from the beginning.
> Select the symbol.
Skip back one paragraph.
> Select the symbol.
Skip over a paragraph.
> To terminate the reading, move the
MINI joystick to the left.
What to do if…
For information on suitable mobile phones, refer
to page 173.
> Appointments, tasks, notes, or text
messages are not being displayed?
The mobile phone is not suitable for the
missing function or is not correctly
connected.
The mobile phone is connected as an
auxiliary phone.
The Office function is deactivated.
The appointments are older than 20 days
and are more than 50 days in the future.
The tasks have been marked as completed
or are more than 90 days in the future.
Depending on the number of appointments,
tasks, notes, and messages stored in the
mobile phone, not all of them are displayed
in the vehicle.
> Appointments or tasks from the mobile
phone are not being displayed at the correct
time?
The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly set
in the Control Display and in the mobile
phone.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Office COMMUNICATIONS
191
> Texts of entries are not displayed com-
pletely?
Texts are already shortened by the mobile
phone.
Synchronization between the mobile phone
and vehicle can take a few minutes.
> Contact pictures are not being displayed?
Up to max. 200 contact pictures can be
stored in the vehicle.
> If you have gone through all items in the list
and still cannot activate the desired function
please contact the Hotline or your MINI
dealer.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
COMMUNICATIONS MINI Connected
192
MINI Connected
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Overview
The concept
You can use MINI Connected to integrate certain
software applications of a suitable mobile phone
into your MINI. These software applications are
displayed on the Control Display. They are
operated using the MINI joystick.
The range of software applications can be
country-specific.
Requirements
The following requirements must be met for the
function of MINI Connected:
> The operating system of the mobile phone
must support the software applications of
MINI Connected.
> The software applications are installed on
the mobile phone and are operational.
> Suitable mobile phone
> Appropriate mobile phone contract.
Possible additional costs incurred are not
included with MINI Connected.
Only make entries when the traffic situa-
tion allows you to do so. If you do not
observe this precaution, your being distracted
can endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.
For safety reasons, some software applications
can only be used when the vehicle is stopped.<
Only use software applications approved
by the manufacturer of your MINI; other-
wise, malfunctions may result.<
Notes
For information on suitable mobile phones,
available software applications, and their
installation:
> At: www.mini.com/connectivity
> At your MINI dealer.
Connecting a mobile
phone
Connecting via the USB audio interface
1 USB interface
2 Connection for audio/video playback:
TRS connector 1/8"/3.5 mm
Connect the mobile phone using the special
connecting cable, available at your MINI dealer,
to the USB interface 1 and the AV-IN
connection 2.
To perform other operations on the mobile
phone, refer to the Owner's Manual for the
mobile phone: e.g. selecting and activating
a software application.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MINI Connected COMMUNICATIONS
193
Connecting via the snap-in adapter
The mobile phone can also be connected using
the snap-in adapter, refer to page 182.
Using MINI Connected
After successful connection of the mobile phone
to the vehicle and activation of MINI Connected,
the applications are displayed on the Control
Display and can be operated using the MINI
joystick.
Volume adjustments can be made using the
buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10,
or using the volume control knob on the radio,
refer to page 141.
1. Press the button.
This opens the main menu.
2. "MINI Connected"
3. Select the desired software application.
The extent of MINI Connected that is shown on
the Control Display depends on the range of
installed software applications on the mobile
phone.
The data transfer of the software applica-
tion from the telephone to the vehicle can
take a few minutes. Some software applications
depend on the speed of the available Internet
connection for the mobile phone.<
Certain versions of mobile phones used and
their software can make it impossible to use
MINI Connected and the Bluetooth hands-free
system at the same time.
After a phone call, it may be necessary to restart
the software application on the mobile phone.
PlugIn
Selected functions for an iPod-Out® compatible
Apple device via a video connection are shown
on the Control Display. Operation is via the
MINI joystick and an onboard monitor.
1. Connecting an Apple device.
> Via a USB audio interface, refer to
page 192.
> Via the snap-in adapter, refer to
page 182.
2. "MINI Connected"
3. "PlugIn"
4. Select the type of connection: "Activate via
AUX connection" or "Activate via Snap-In
adapter"
5. "Activate PlugIn"
6. Navigate among the functions shown via
a MINI joystick and, e.g., select a desired
category or track.
Press the button to return back or to change
to a level higher within the functions of the
Apple device.
Press the button twice to return back to the
main menu.
Additional information can be found in the
MINI Connected Owner's Manual at
www.mini.com/connectivity.
Note
Audio and video playback from a snap-in
adapter may only be possible if there is no cable
connected to the AV-In port.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Move Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATIONS
REFERENCE
MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Refueling
196
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
Switch off the engine before refueling;
otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the
tank and a message will be displayed.<
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con-
tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.<
Fuel filler flap
Opening
1. Open the fuel filler flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message
will be displayed if the fuel cap is loose or
missing.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler flap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
manually release the fuel filler flap:
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster:
1. Remove the cover from the left-hand side-
wall of the cargo area.
2. Pull on the green knob with the fuel pump
symbol. The fuel filler flap is released.
MINI Convertible:
1. Remove the cover from the left-hand side-
wall of the cargo area.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Refueling MOBILITY
197
2. Pull on the green knob with the fuel pump
symbol. The fuel filler flap is released.
Observe the following when refueling
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel; otherwise, there is a danger of
personal injury and property damage.<
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise,
overflowing fuel can cause damage to the
environment and the vehicle.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler
nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead
to
> premature pump shutoff
> reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor
recovery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
If the range displayed is less than
30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other-
wise, engine functions are not guaranteed and
damage could occur.<
Approx. 13.2 US gal/50 liters, including the
reserve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.
Fuel specifications
Gasoline
For optimum fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be free of sulfur or as low in sulfur as possible.
Fuels that are labeled at the pump as containing
metal may not be used.
Do not fill the tank with leaded gasoline or
gasoline that contains metal additives,
such as manganese or iron; otherwise, long term
damage to the catalytic converter or other
components may result.<
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of up to
10%, that is, E10, can be used.
The ethanol should meet the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806-xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511-xx
xx: Always observe currently valid standards.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel con-
taining 85% ethanol, nor with FlexFuel.
Otherwise, the engine and fuel supply system
will be damaged.<
The engine is knocking regulated. Therefore,
different grades of gasoline can be used for
refueling.
Recommended gasoline grades
The manufacturer of your MINI recommends:
> AKI 91.
> John Cooper Works AKI 93.
Minimum grade
The manufacturer of your MINI recommends
AKI 89.
Do not use any gasoline below the speci-
fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.<
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rating,
the engine may produce knocking sounds when
starting at high external temperatures. This has
no effect on the engine life.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Refueling
198
The use of poor quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage.
Additionally, problems relating to driveability,
starting and stalling, especially under certain
environmental conditions such as high ambient
temperatures and high altitudes, may occur.
If driveability problems are encountered, we
recommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade - AKI number -
for a few tankfuls. To avoid harmful engine
deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase
gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in a need for unscheduled mainte-
nance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
199
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire
pressure.
Checking pressure
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail
to observe this precaution you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition
that can not only compromise your vehicle's
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and
the risk of an accident. Do not drive with
deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using run-
flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your
vehicle's handling and braking response.
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of
control over the vehicle.<
Check the tire inflation pressures only on cold
tires. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/
2 km driving or when the vehicle has been
parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm,
the tire inflation pressure is higher.
After adjusting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, page 83,
or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, page 86.<
Checking the tire inflation pressure of
the compact tire
A valve extension for checking the inflation
pressure is located behind the bumper.
Inflation pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The tire inflation pressures apply to the
tire sizes approved and the tire brands
recommended by the manufacturer of your
MINI. Your MINI dealer will be glad to advise
you.<
For correct identification of the right tire
inflation pressures, observe the following:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of
100 mph or 160 km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's
door is open.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
200
The maximum permitted speed for these
tire inflation pressures is 100 mph or
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise,
tire damage and accidents may occur.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving above
100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
columns for traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise,
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits; otherwise, violations of the law could
occur.
MINI Cooper Coupe tire inflation pressures
Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi
All pressure specifications in the
table are indicated in bar/psi for
cold tires. Cold = ambient
temperature
175/65 R 15 84 T M+S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H Std
175/65 R 15 84 H M+S A/S Std
195/55 R 16 87 H RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S A/S RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
2.4/35 2.4/35
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC 2.6/38 2.6/38
Space-saver spare tire:
T 115/70 R 15 90 M
Speed up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
201
MINI Cooper S Coupe tire inflation pressures
MINI John Cooper Works Coupe tire inflation pressures
Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi
All pressure specifications in the
table are indicated in bar/psi for
cold tires. Cold = ambient
temperature
195/55 R 16 87 V RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S RSC
2.6/38 2.6/38
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC
2.8/41 2.8/41
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi
All pressure specifications in the
table are indicated in bar/psi for
cold tires. Cold = ambient
temperature
185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 W RSC
2.7/39 2.7/39
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC 2.9/42 2.9/42
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
202
MINI Cooper Roadster tire inflation pressures
Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi
All pressure specifications in the
table are indicated in bar/psi for
cold tires. Cold = ambient
temperature
175/65 R 15 84 T M+S
175/65 R 15 84 H
175/65 R 15 84 H M+S A/S
195/55 R 16 87 H RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S A/S RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
2.4/35 2.4/35
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC 2.6/38 2.6/38
Space-saver spare tire:
T 115/70 R 15 90 M
Speed up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
203
MINI Cooper S Roadster tire inflation pressures
MINI John Cooper Works Roadster tire inflation pressures
Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi
All pressure specifications in the
table are indicated in bar/psi for
cold tires. Cold = ambient
temperature
195/55 R 16 87 V RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC
2.6/38 2.6/38
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC
2.8/41 2.8/41
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi
All pressure specifications in the
table are indicated in bar/psi for
cold tires. Cold = ambient
temperature
185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 84 W RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
2.7/39 2.7/39
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC 2.9/42 2.9/42
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
204
MINI Cooper Convertible tire inflation pressures
Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi
Speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the
table are indicated in bar/psi for
cold tires. Cold = ambient
temperature
175/65 R 15 84 T M+S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H Std
175/65 R 15 84 H M+S A/S Std
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S A/S RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
2.4/35 2.4/35 2.6/38 2.6/38
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
205
MINI Cooper S Convertible tire inflation pressures
Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi
Speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the
table are indicated in bar/psi for
cold tires. Cold = ambient
temperature
195/55 R 16 87 V RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S RSC
2.4/35 2.4/35 2.6/38 2.6/38
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC
2.7/39 2.7/39 2.9/42 2.9/42
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
206
MINI John Cooper Works Convertible tire inflation pressures
Tire coding
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi
Speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the
table are indicated in bar/psi for
cold tires. Cold = ambient
temperature
185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 W RSC
2.7/39 2.7/39 2.9/42 2.9/42
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC 2.9/42 2.9/42 3.1/45 3.1/45
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect
ratio in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating,
(not on ZR tires)
Speed code letter,
(before the R on ZR tires)
225/45 R 17 91 V
For instance:
Manufacturer's code
for tire make
tire size and
tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 1012
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
207
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1γ)
times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.<
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel that exceed the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC - run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of
the tire, page 208.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than
summer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires regularly for tread wear, signs
of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the
tread. Check the tread depth.
Tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below
0.12 in/3 mm there is an increased risk of high-
speed hydroplaning, even when only small
amounts of water are present on the road
surface.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
208
Winter tires
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
are distributed around the tire's circumference;
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate
these wear indicators. When tire tread is worn
down to the level of the wear indicators, the
remaining tread depth is 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
Tire damage
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
well as debris, curbs, and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires, and sus-
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed,
especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-
profile tires.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same
applies to any other abnormal road behavior,
such as pulling severely to the right or left.
In these cases, reduce speed immediately
and have wheels and tires thoroughly
checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest
MINI dealer or a specialized tire shop that has
specially trained personnel working in accor-
dance with the specifications of the MINI manu-
facturer. If necessary, have the vehicle towed
there.
Otherwise, tire damage can be extremely
dangerous for vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding:
DOT ... 1012 means that the tire was manu-
factured during the 10th week of 2012.
For various reasons, such as the development
of brittleness, the manufacturer of your MINI
recommends tire replacement after no more
than 6 years, regardless of the actual wear of the
tires.
Run-flat tires
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-flat tires comprise a conditionally self-sup-
porting tire and a special rim. The reinforcement
in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can con-
tinue to be used subject to certain restrictions,
even if depressurized.
For information on continuing to drive with a flat
tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 84.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
209
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires mounted only
by your MINI dealer or a specialized tire
shop that has specially trained personnel work-
ing in accordance with the specifications of the
MINI manufacturer. If this work is not carried out
properly, there is a danger of subsequent
damage and related safety hazards. Make sure
that the new wheels are balanced.<
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your MINI recom-
mends that you avoid using retreaded
tires, as this could impair driving safety. The
causes for this include potentially different tire
casing structures and often wide variations in
tire age, which can result in a limited service
life.<
Correct wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your MINI recom-
mends mounting only wheels and tires
that it has specifically approved for use on your
particular model. Although other wheels and
tires may theoretically have the same dimen-
sions, variations in factors such as manufactur-
ing tolerances can result in contact between tire
and bodywork, ultimately leading to serious
accidents. The manufacturer of your MINI can-
not evaluate non-approved wheels and tires to
determine if they are suited for use, and there-
fore cannot ensure the operating safety of the
vehicle if they are mounted.<
Your MINI dealer will be glad to inform you
about the correct wheel and tire combination for
your vehicle.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is
also necessary to ensure reliable operation of
various vehicle systems such as ABS and DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single brand and
tread configuration. After a tire has been
damaged, mount the previous wheel and tire
combination again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over from
summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the Tire
Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect a
puncture, refer to page 86. Your MINI dealer will
be glad to advise you.
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your MINI
recommends certain tire brands. They are
marked with a clearly visible MINI designation
on the sidewall of the tire.
When properly used, these tires meet the high-
est standards in terms of safety and handling
characteristics.
Run-flat tires
When mounting new tires or changing over from
summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount
run-flat tires for your own safety. Keep in mind
that no space-saver spare tire is available in the
event of a flat. Your MINI dealer will be glad to
advise you.
Special characteristics of winter tires
The manufacturer of your MINI recommends the
use of winter tires on snowy roads or if temper-
atures drop below 457/ +76. Although all-
season M+S tires provide better winter traction
than summer tires, they generally fail to provide
the same levels of cold-weather performance as
winter tires.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
210
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for the
winter tires mounted on your car; failure
to do so could result in tire damage and acci-
dents.<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that
permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the
maximum permitted speed for the mounted
tires must be displayed in your field of view. This
label is available at your tire dealer or MINI
dealer.
Storage
Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire.
Swapping wheels among the axles
Depending on the individual use, front and rear
tires may exhibit different wear and tear.
In order to maintain an even wear and tear, the
wheels may be rotated between the axles. Your
MINI dealer will be glad to advise you.
Always check the inflation pressure after the tire
rotation, if necessary change the pressure.
Snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have
been tested by the manufacturer of your MINI,
classified as road-safe and recommended.
Contact your MINI dealer for more details.
Only attach snow chains in pairs to the front
wheels with the following tires.
> 175/65 R 15 M+S
> 175/60 R 16 M+S
John Cooper Works:
> 185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph or 50 km/h.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if
snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the
instrument might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, it can be useful
to briefly deactivate DSC or activate DTC, refer to
page 80.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Engine compartment MOBILITY
211
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without
the required professional technical training. If
you do not know how to follow the specified
instructions, then have the work carried out by
your MINI dealer. If this work is not carried out
properly, there is a danger of subsequent
damage and related safety hazards.<
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Vehicle identification number
2 Battery, under the cover 233
3 Engine oil dipstick 212
4 Engine oil filler neck 213
5 Coolant expansion tank 214
6 Reservoir for washer fluid for the headlamp
and window washer system 65
7 Engine compartment fuse box 232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Engine compartment
212
Hood
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Do not clean the windshield and head-
lamps if the hood is unlocked as this may
damage the headlamp washer system.<
Opening
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the hood.<
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
If you notice any signs while driving your
vehicle that the hood is not completely
closed, stop at once and close it securely.
Make sure that the closing path of the hood is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.<
Engine oil
Engine oil consumption depends on driving style
and operating conditions, e.g., with a very
sporty driving style, the engine oil consumption
is significantly increased.
Therefore, check the engine oil level regularly
after each refueling.
Checking engine oil level
1. With the vehicle's engine at normal
operating temperature, i.e. after uninter-
rupted driving for at least 6 miles/10 km,
park the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Pull the dipstick out after approx. 5 minutes
and wipe it off with a lint-free cloth, paper
towel or similar material.
4. Carefully push the dipstick all the way into
the guide tube and pull it out again.
The oil level should be between the two
marks on the dipstick.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Engine compartment MOBILITY
213
The oil quantity corresponding to the difference
between the two marks on the dipstick is
1 US quart/1 liter.
Do not fill beyond the upper mark on the
dipstick. Excess oil will damage the
engine.<
Adding engine oil
Do not add the maximum quantity of
1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until the oil level
has dropped to just above the lower mark on the
dipstick, page 212.
Add oil within the next 30 miles/50 km;
otherwise, the engine could be dam-
aged.<
If too much motor oil is added, immedi-
ately have the vehicle checked; otherwise,
damage to the engine may result.<
Keep oils, grease, etc. out of the reach of
children and comply with the warnings on
the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may
result.<
Oil types for refilling
Notes
Do not use oil additives as this could result
in engine damage.<
When selecting a motor oil, ensure that it
belongs to one of the SAE viscosity classes
0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40 and 5W-30; otherwise,
malfunctions or damage to the engine may
result.<
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Some types of oil may not be available in every
country.
Approved oil types
Additional information on approved types of oil
can be found at a MINI dealer.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available,
up to 1 US quart/1 liter of another oil with the
following specifications may be used:
Oil change
Only MINI dealers are to perform oil changes.
Gasoline engines
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Gasoline engines
API SM or higher specifications
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Engine compartment
214
Coolant
Coolant consists of half water and half additive.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for your MINI. Your MINI dealer knows
which additives are suitable and will be glad to
advise you.
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may result. Because addi-
tives are harmful to your health, it is important
to follow the instructions on the containers.<
Comply with the appropriate environmen-
tal protection regulations when disposing
of coolant additives.<
Coolant temperature
If the coolant, and therefore the engine, should
overheat, then a warning lamp will go on.
A message appears on the Control Display.
Checking coolant level
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
The coolant level is correct if it is between the
marks.
Topping off
1. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little
counterclockwise to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning to
open.
2. Slowly fill to the correct fluid level; do not
overfill.
3. Close by turning the cap.
Have the reason for the coolant loss eliminated
as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Maintenance MOBILITY
215
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
MINI Maintenance System
The MINI Maintenance System will remind you
of necessary maintenance measures and by
doing so, will assist you in maintaining the traffic
and operating safety of your vehicle.
If and when you come to sell your MINI, a
comprehensive record of servicing will prove
a significant benefit.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take the different
driving conditions of your MINI into account.
Condition Based Service uses this to determine
the current and future service requirements. By
letting you define a service and maintenance
regimen that reflects your own individual
requirements, the system builds the basis for
trouble-free driving.
On the Control Display, you can have the
remaining times or distances for selected main-
tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates
displayed, page 71.
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously stores service-
requirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your MINI dealer can read
out this data from the remote control unit, and
propose an optimized maintenance approach.
Whenever you take your car in for servicing you
should therefore hand your MINI dealer the
remote control unit that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set
correctly, page 73; otherwise, the effec-
tiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not
assured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian
models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
The manufacturer of the MINI recom-
mends that you have service and repair
operations performed at your MINI dealer.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Maintenance
216
Socket for On-Board
Diagnosis OBD
The primary components that make up the
emissions can be checked by a device via the
OBD socket.
Emissions
The warning lamps come on. The vehicle
is producing higher emissions. You can
continue your journey, but moderate
your speed and exercise due caution.
Have the car checked as soon as possible.
Under certain circumstances, one of the lamps
will flash or light up continuously. This indicates
excessive misfiring or a malfunction in the
engine. If this happens, reduce your speed and
visit the nearest MINI dealer as soon as possible.
Severe misfiring can quickly lead to serious
damage of emissions-related components,
especially the catalytic converter. In addition,
mechanical engine components can become
damaged.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the OBD system may conclude that fuel
vapors are escaping, causing an indica-
tor to light up. If the fuel cap is then tightened,
the indicator should go out within a few days.
Data memory
Your vehicle displays data about the operation,
malfunctions, and user settings. These data are
stored in the vehicle and can be partly stored in
the remote control; the data can be read by
suitable devices, in particular at your MINI
dealer. The data read out are used for support-
ing the service processes and repair or for opti-
mization and development of vehicle functions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Care MOBILITY
217
Care
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Car-care products
Regular cleaning and care helps to maintain the
value of your MINI.
The manufacturer of your MINI recommends
using manufacturer-approved products to clean
and care for your vehicle.
Your MINI dealer would be pleased to advise
you on cleaning and care products and services
for your MINI.
The ingredients of original MINI Care
Products have been tested, and the
products have been tested in the laboratory
and in practice. They offer optimum care and
protection for your vehicle.<
Do not use any cleansers containing
alcohol or solvents as these may cause
damage.<
Cleaning agents may contain hazardous
or health-damaging substances. Follow
the warning and hazard instructions on the
packaging. For interior cleaning, always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle.
Do not use any products that are not intended
for cleaning the vehicle.<
External care
Washing your vehicle
Especially during the winter months the
vehicle should be frequently washed. Dirt
and road salt can damage the vehicle.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise,
water can reduce braking efficiency over the
short term and the brake rotors can corrode.<
Car washes
Preference should be given to cloth car washes.
Do not use automatic high-pressure car
washes; otherwise, water may drip into
the vehicle around the windows.<
Before driving into the car wash, check if the
system is suitable for your MINI. Observe the
following points:
> Vehicle dimensions, page 241.
> If necessary: fold in the outside mirrors,
page 52.
> Maximum permissible tire width.
Avoid car washes with tracks higher than
4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the chassis could
be damaged.<
Preparations for driving into the car wash:
> Unscrew the rod antenna.
> MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: retract spoiler.
> Deactivate the rain sensor to prevent unin-
tentional wiping.
> Remove additional attachments, e.g.
spoilers or telephone antennas, if there is
a possibility that they could be damaged.
> Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Care
218
Automatic transmission
Before driving into the car wash, make sure that
the vehicle can roll:
1. Place the remote control, even with Comfort
Access, in the ignition lock.
2. Move the selector lever to position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Insert the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Steam jets/high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, make sure that you maintain
sufficient distance from the vehicle and do not
exceed a maximum temperature of 1407/
606.
If the distance is too close, the pressure too high,
or the temperature too high, parts of the vehicle
can be damaged, or water can penetrate.
Observe the operating instructions for high-
pressure washers.<
Do not spray sensors, such as the Park
Distance Control, with high-pressure
washers for a long time or at a distance of less
than 1 ft/30 cm.<
Manual washing
Use a great deal of water and, if necessary, car
shampoo when washing your car by hand. Clean
the vehicle with a sponge or a washing brush
applying a slight amount of pressure.
Before cleaning the windshield, deacti-
vate the rain sensor or turn off the ignition
to prevent unintentional wiping.<
Observe local regulations regarding
washing vehicles by hand.<
Headlamps
Do not wipe dry and do not use abrasive or
corrosive cleaning agents. Remove dirt and
contamination, such as insects, by soaking with
shampoo and then washing with plenty of
water.
Do not remove accumulated ice and snow with
an ice scraper; use window deicers instead.
Windows
Clean the outside and inside of the windows and
mirrors with a window cleaner.
Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners
containing quartz.<
Wiper blades
Clean with soapy water and change regularly to
prevent the formation of streaks.
Wax, preservatives and dirt on the
windows cause streaks when the wind-
shield wipers are on, and can cause premature
wear of the wiper blades and interfere with the
rain sensor.<
Care of the convertible top
The appearance and service life of the
convertible top largely depends on its proper
care and operation.
Please follow these instructions:
> Never attempt to fold and stow the convert-
ible top in the convertible compartment
when the top is wet or frozen. Otherwise,
water stains, mildew, and chafe marks may
occur.
> If water spots occur on the inside headliner
despite precautions, remove them using a
microfiber cloth and interior cleaner.
> If the vehicle is parked in an enclosed area
for a longer period of time, make sure that
there is sufficient ventilation.
> Remove any bird droppings immediately,
since they have corrosive properties which
will corrode the convertible top and damage
the rubber seals.
When attempting to remove stains from
the convertible top, do not use spot
removers, paint thinners, solvents, gasoline, or
similar fluids. These cleaners may damage the
rubber seals. The improper care or cleaning
methods may cause the convertible top and its
seams to leak.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Care MOBILITY
219
Use special convertible top cleaning agents if
attempting to remove heavy stains.
Always read and follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Use an impregnating agent to treat the
convertible top once a year.
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: rear spoiler
compartment
So that the operation of the rear spoiler is not
compromised, e.g., by leaves, snow or ice, clean
the rear spoiler compartment at regular inter-
vals.
Paintwork, care
Regular care helps your vehicle retain its value
and protects the paint from the long-term
effects of aggressive substances.
Environmental influences in areas with
increased air pollution or natural contaminants,
such as tree sap or pollen, can affect the vehicle
paintwork. It is therefore important to adjust the
frequency and extent of vehicle care corre-
spondingly.
Immediately remove any particularly aggressive
substances, such as fuel that has overflowed, oil,
grease, brake fluid, or bird droppings; otherwise,
paint damage can be caused.
Removing paintwork damage
Depending on the severity of the damage,
immediately repair stone damage or
scratches to prevent rusting.<
The manufacturer of the MINI recommends
repairing paint damage professionally according
to factory specifications with original MINI
paints.
Preservation
Preservation is necessary when water no longer
beads on the clean paint surface. To preserve
the paint, only use preservatives that contain
carnauba or synthetic waxes.
Rubber seals
Only treat with water or rubber care products.
Do not use silicon sprays or other silicon-
containing care products on rubber seals;
otherwise, noise and damage could occur.<
Chrome parts
Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radiator
grill and door handles with copious quantities of
water and, if necessary, a shampoo additive,
especially when contaminated with road salt.
For additional treatment, use chrome polish.
Light alloy wheels
The system produces brake dust that collects on
the light alloy wheels. Clean them regularly with
acid-free wheel cleaner.
Do not use aggressive, acid-containing,
highly alkaline, or abrasive cleansers or
steam jets hotter than 1407/606 as they may
cause damage.<
External sensors
Keep the outside sensors on the vehicle
such as the Park Distance Control clean
and ice-free to ensure that they function
properly.<
Internal care
Upholstery/fabrics
Regularly use a vacuum cleaner to remove
surface dirt.
In case of serious spots such as liquid stains, use
a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth and
suitable interior cleaners. Observe the instruc-
tions on the packaging.
Clean upholstery up to the seams. Do not
rub forcefully.<
Velcro fasteners on pants or other items of
clothing can damage seat covers. Make
sure that all Velcro fasteners are closed.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Care
220
Leather/leather coverings
The leather processed by the manufac-
turer of your MINI is a high-quality natural
product. Light variations in the grain is one of
the typical properties of natural leather.<
Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the
leather have an abrasive effect, leading to
increased wear and causing the leather surface
to become brittle prematurely. Use a cloth or
vacuum cleaner to remove dust on a regular
basis.
Especially when the leather has a light color, it
should be cleaned regularly since it tends to get
heavily soiled.
Treat the leather twice a year using a leather
lotion since dirt and grease will gradually attack
the leather's protective layer.
Carpets/floor mats
Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects
out of the movement range of the pedals;
otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the
pedals during driving.
Do not place additional floor mats onto an
existing one or onto other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened.
Make sure that the floor mats are securely
fastened again after they have been removed,
e.g. for cleaning.<
Floor mats can be removed to be cleaned.
If the carpets are very dirty, clean with a micro-
fiber cloth and water or an interior cleaner.
When doing so, rub forward and back in the
driving direction; otherwise, the carpet may
become matted.
Interior plastic parts
These include:
> Plastic surfaces
> Lamp glass
> Display panes
> Mat parts
Only clean with water and, if necessary, solvent-
free plastic cleaners.
Do not use solvents such as alcohol, lac-
quer thinner, cold cleaners, fuel, or similar,
as these will damage the surfaces.<
Decorative strips
Only clean decorative strips and fine wood parts
with damp cloths. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Do not clean chemically, as this may
destroy the webbing.<
Displays
To clean displays, such as the radio or display
elements, use an anti-static microfiber cloth.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning
the display as this can cause damage.<
Do not use chemical or abrasive house-
hold cleaning agents. Keep fluids of any
kind away from the device. Surfaces or electrical
components may otherwise become corroded
or damaged.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use cleaning CDs as this could
damage parts of the drive.<
Vehicle storage
If you park your vehicle longer than three
months, ask your MINI dealer to advise you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Replacing components MOBILITY
221
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Toolkit
Your vehicle comes with a toolkit that varies
with the equipment version; it is stored under-
neath the flat load floor.
With Mobility Kit
1 Sealant bottle
2 Hexagon wrench
3 Extractor hook
4 Vehicle jack
5 Wheel stud wrench
6 Flat screwdriver/Phillips screwdriver, towing
eyelet
7 Compressor
Run-flat tires or space-saver spare tire
The toolkit includes a pouch with a plastic bag in
which you can place the damaged wheel.
1 Folding chock and cover for defective wheel
2 Extractor hook
3 Wheel stud wrench
4 Vehicle jack
5 Special wrench for removing the space-
saver spare tire
6 Flat screwdriver/Phillips screwdriver
7 Towing eyelet
8 Lifting handle
Wiper blades
Do not place windshield wipers on the
windshield if wiper blades are not
installed; otherwise, the windshield may be
damaged.<
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster: wiper blade
replacement
1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Replacing components
222
2. Press together the locking spring, arrows 1,
and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Pull the wiper blade forward and out of the
catch mechanism.
4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixture
until it engages audibly.
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the hood.<
MINI Convertible: wiper blade
replacement
1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.
2. Press locking spring together, arrows 1.
3. Hold locking spring pressed together and
pull wiper blade from wiper arm, arrow 2.
4. Slide the new wiper blade onto the wind-
shield wiper arm until it audibly engages.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the hood.<
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be
handled carefully. The manufacturer of your
MINI recommends having your MINI dealer per-
form any work that you do not feel competent to
perform yourself or that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold
the bulb by its base.<
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your MINI dealer.
Only replace bulbs after they have cooled
down; otherwise, you may burn your
fingers.<
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the con-
sumer in question; otherwise, short circuits
could result. To avoid possible injury or equip-
ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe
any instructions provided by the bulb manufac-
turer.<
Caring for headlamps, refer to page 218.
For any bulb replacement not described
below, contact a MINI dealer or a work-
shop that has specially trained personnel
working in accordance with the specifications
of the MINI manufacturer.<
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your MINI dealer.<
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light sources for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes are related to conven-
tional laser diodes, and legislation defines them
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours; otherwise, this could cause
irritation of the retina.<
Headlamp glass lens
In cool or humid weather, condensation may
occur on the interiors of the headlamps. The
condensation disappears a short time after the
light is switched on. The headlamps do not need
to be changed.
Do not remove the condensation from head-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Replacing components MOBILITY
223
lamps, despite driving with lights on, and if
condensation increases, e.g., because of water
droplets, have this checked by your MINI dealer.
Xenon lamps
The service life of these bulbs is very long and
the probability of failure very low, provided that
they are not switched on and off an excessive
number of times. If a xenon lamp fails neverthe-
less, switch on the fog lamps and continue the
journey with great care, provided that local leg-
islation does not prohibit this.
Work on the xenon lighting system,
including lamp replacement, is only to be
carried out only by your MINI dealer. Due to high
voltage, there is a risk of fatal injury if work on
the xenon lamps is carried out improperly.<
Halogen low beams and high beams
H13 bulb, 60/55 watts
The H13 bulb is pressurized. Therefore,
wear safety glasses and protective gloves.
Otherwise, there is a risk of injury if the bulb is
damaged.<
Be careful when installing the cover; oth-
erwise, leaks could occur and cause dam-
age to the headlamp system.<
Accessing the lamp from the engine
compartment
The low-beam/high-beam bulb can be changed
from the engine compartment.
Removing the cover:
1. Press the tab.
2. Flip open the cover and take it out of the
holder.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to
reattach the cover.
Be careful when installing the cover;
otherwise, leaks could occur and cause
damage to the headlamp system.<
Replacing the bulb
1. Turn the lamp counterclockwise, arrow 1,
and remove it, arrow 2.
2. Push on the catch, arrow 1, and disconnect
the connector, arrow 2.
3. To insert the new bulb and replace the
cover, proceed in reverse order.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Replacing components
224
Turn signals, parking lamps, roadside
parking lamps, and fog lamps
Accessing the lamps via the wheel well
1 Turn signal
2 Parking/roadside parking/fog lamps
Replacing a turn signal bulb
21 watt bulb, PY 21 W
1. Turn in the wheel.
2. Remove cover 1.
To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Remove the inside cover.
To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.
4. Unscrew the bulb counterclockwise.
5. To insert the new bulb and replace the
covers, proceed in reverse order.
Replacing a parking/roadside parking
lamp bulb
5 watt bulb, W 5 W
1. Turn in the wheel.
2. Remove cover 2.
To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Unscrew the upper bulb counterclockwise.
4. To insert the new bulb and replace the
cover, proceed in reverse order.
Replacing a fog lamp bulb
H8 bulb, 35 watts
1. Turn in the wheel.
2. Remove cover 2.
To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Pull the cable connector.
4. Unscrew the lower bulb counterclockwise.
5. To insert the new bulb and replace the
cover, proceed in reverse order.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Replacing components MOBILITY
225
Side turn signals
5watt bulb, W5W
1. Push the lamp with the ventilation grate
forward and remove.
2. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise.
3. Pull out and replace the bulb.
4. To insert the new bulb and replace the
cover, proceed in reverse order.
Tail lamps
Turn signals: 21 watt bulb, PY 21 W
Brake light: bulb 21 Watt/5 Watt, W 5 W
Other lights: bulb 21 Watt, P 21 W
1 Turn signal
2 Tail lamp LED
3 Brake light
Changing
1. Remove the cover from the sidewall of the
cargo area.
MINI Coupe, MINI Roadster:
MINI Convertible:
Move the convertible top to its uppermost
position, refer to Loading aid page 111, and
remove the cover of the luggage compart-
ment side wall.
2. Unscrew the desired bulb counterclockwise,
arrows 1.
Another bulb is located behind the luggage
compartment side wall, arrow 2.
3. To insert the new bulb and replace the
cover, proceed in reverse order.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Replacing components
226
Rear fog lamps/Reverse lights
Bulbs 16 Watt, W 16W
Access the lamps via the rear or underside of the
bumper.
1. Press fastening clips, arrows, together and
remove the lamp holder.
2. Remove the bulb and replace it.
3. To insert the new bulb and bulb holder,
proceed in reverse order.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
John Cooper Works: aerodynamic
bumper
Access the lamps via the rear or underside of the
bumper.
1. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise,
arrow.
2. Remove the bulb and replace it.
3. To insert the new bulb and bulb holder,
proceed in reverse order.
License plate lamps
5 watt bulb, C 5 W
1. Using a screwdriver, push the lamp to the
left in the tab of the lamp housing, arrow 1.
2. Remove the lamp, arrow 2.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Insert the lamp.
Center brake lamp
This lamp uses LED technology for operation. In
the event of a malfunction, contact your MINI
dealer or a workshop that has specially trained
personnel working in accordance with the
specifications of your MINI manufacturer.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures in the event of a break-
down:
Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving
traffic and switch on the hazard warning
flashers.
Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock. Engage the parking
brake and shift into 1st or reverse gear or place
the selector lever in position P.
All passengers should be outside the vehicle and
in a safe place, e.g. behind a guardrail.
Erect a warning triangle or warning flasher at the
appropriate distance if necessary. Comply with
all safety guidelines and regulations.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Replacing components MOBILITY
227
In the event of a flat tire, different procedures
should be followed depending on the equip-
ment included in your vehicle:
> MINI Mobility Kit, refer to the following
section
> Run-flat tires, page 229
> Tire change with space-saver spare tire,
page 229
MINI Mobility Kit
Preparations
Use of the MINI Mobility Kit may be ineffective if
the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 in/4 mm
or more. Contact the nearest MINI dealer if the
tire cannot be made drivable with the Mobility
Kit.
Do not remove foreign bodies which have
penetrated the tire if possible.
Follow the instructions on using the
Mobility Kit found on the compressor
and the sealant bottle.<
Remove the adhesive label for the speed limit
from the sealant bottle and affix it to the
steering wheel.
Sealant and compressor
1 Sealant bottle and adhesive label with speed
limit
2 Filling hose
Note the use-by date on the sealant
bottle.<
3 Holder for the sealant bottle
4 Compressor
5 Plug and cable for the socket in the vehicle
interior, page 104
6 Connection hose to connect the compressor
and sealant bottle or the compressor and
wheel
7 On/off switch
8 Pressure gauge for indicating the tire infla-
tion pressure
9 Release button for reducing the tire inflation
pressure
Connector, cable and connection hose are
stored in the compressor housing.
Using the Mobility Kit
To repair a tire puncture with the Mobility Kit,
proceed as follows:
> Filling the tire with sealant.
> Distributing the sealant.
> Correct the tire inflation pressure.
Filling the tire with sealant.
Proceed in the specified order; otherwise,
sealant may emerge under high pres-
sure.<
1. Shake the sealant bottle.
2. Pull the connecting hose 6 completely out of
the compressor housing and screw it onto
the connector of the sealant bottle. Make
sure that the hose is not kinked.
3. Insert the sealant bottle on the compressor
housing in an upright position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Replacing components
228
4. Unscrew the dust cap from the valve of the
defective wheel and screw the filling hose 2
of the sealant bottle onto the valve.
5. Ensure that the compressor is switched off.
6. Insert the plug 5 into the lighter socket/
power socket in the vehicle interior,
page 104.
7. With the engine running:
Switch on the compressor and let run for
about 3 to 8 minutes in order to add the
sealant and to achieve an inflation pressure
of about 1.8 bar/26 psi.
When adding the sealant, the filling
pressure can temporarily increase up
to about 5 bar/73 psi. Do not switch off the
compressor during this phase.<
Do not run the compressor for longer
than 10 minutes; otherwise, the
device will overheat and possibly be
damaged.<
8. Switch off the compressor.
If an inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is not
reached:
1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 from the wheel
and drive the vehicle forward and backward
approx. 33 ft/10 m to distribute the liquid
sealant in the tire evenly.
2. Inflate the tire again with the compressor.
If an inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is
not reached, then the tire is too badly
damaged. Please contact the nearest MINI
dealer.<
Stowing Mobility Kit
1. Unscrew filler hose 2 of the sealant bottle
from the wheel.
2. Unscrew connecting hose of the
compressor 6 from the sealant bottle.
3. Connect the filler hose 2 of the sealant
bottle to the unoccupied connection on
the sealant bottle.
This prevents the rest of the sealant from
escaping from the bottle.
4. Wrap the empty sealant bottle in suitable
material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
5. Stow Mobility Kit back in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant.
Immediately drive approx. 3.1 miles/5 km so
that the sealant evenly distributes itself.
Do not exceed speeds of 50 mph/
80 km/h.
If possible, do not drop below 10 mph/
20 km/h.<
Adjusting the tire pressure
1. After driving approx. 3.1 miles/5 km or
10 minutes, stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose 6 of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve.
3. Insert the plug 5 into the power socket in
the vehicle interior.
4. Adjust tire pressure to 1.8 bar/26 psi. With
the engine running:
> To increase the inflation pressure: switch on
the compressor. To check the current infla-
tion pressure, switch off the compressor.
Do not run the compressor for longer
than 10 minutes; otherwise, the
device will overheat and possibly be
damaged.<
> To decrease the inflation pressure: press the
release button 9.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Replacing components MOBILITY
229
If the tire cannot maintain the inflation
pressure, drive the vehicle again, refer to
Distributing the sealant. Then repeat steps
1to4.
If an inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi still
cannot be reached, then the tire is too heavily
damaged. Contact your nearest MINI dealer.<
Driving on
Do not exceed the permitted maximum
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h; doing so may
result in an accident.<
Replace the defective tire as soon as possible
and have the new wheel/tire assembly
balanced.
Have the Mobility Kit refilled.
Changing wheels
Run-flat tires
Tire change for run-flat tires:
> Prepare for tire change, page 230
> Jack up vehicle, page 230
> Tighten lug bolts, page 231
Space-saver spare tire
Tire change with space-saver spare tire:
> Remove the space-saver spare tire,
page 229
> Prepare for tire change, page 230
> Jack up vehicle, page 230
> Mount space-saver spare tire, page 231
> Tighten lug bolts, page 231
> Drive with space-saver spare tire, page 230
Removing the space-saver spare tire
The screw connection of the space-saver spare
tire is under the floor mat in the cargo area, on
the base of the storage compartment for the tire
change set.
1. Unscrew the screw connection with the
special wrench.
2. Take out the cover panel.
3. Screw the lifting handle from the toolkit onto
the thread.
4. Raise the lifting handle slightly.
5. Squeeze the securing spring.
6. The space-saver spare tire is released and
must be held by the lifting handle.
7. Lower the space-saver spare tire with the
lifting handle.
8. Unscrew the lifting handle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Replacing components
230
9. Pull the space-saver spare tire underneath
the vehicle out toward the rear.
10. Position the space-saver spare tire with the
valve facing upward.
11. Unscrew the valve extension from the valve
of the space-saver spare tire.
12. Unscrew the dust cap from the extension
and place it on the valve of the space-saver
spare tire.
Due to its different dimensions, the
damaged wheel cannot be placed in the
recess for the space-saver spare tire.<
Driving with the space-saver spare tire
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Changes may
occur in vehicle handling such as lower track
stability during braking, longer braking dis-
tances and changes in self-steering properties
when close to the handling limit. These proper-
ties are more noticeable with winter tires.<
Only one space-saver spare tire may be
mounted at one time. Mount a wheel and
tire of the original size as soon as possible, to
avoid any safety risks.<
Check the tire inflation pressure at the
earliest opportunity and correct it if
necessary. Replace the defective tire as soon as
possible and have the new wheel/tire assembly
balanced.<
Preparing for a tire change
Observe the safety precautions regarding
flat tires on page 226.<
Additional safety measures when chang-
ing tires:
Only change the tire when parked on a surface
that is level, firm and not slippery.
The vehicle or the jack could slip sideways on
soft or slippery support surfaces, such as snow,
ice, flagstones, etc.
Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a
support base for the jack, as this would prevent
it from extending to its full support height and
reduce its load-carrying capacity.
Do not lie under the vehicle or start the engine
when the vehicle is supported by the jack; other-
wise, there is a risk of fatal injury.<
1. Place the foldable chock behind the front
wheel on the other side of the vehicle or in
front of the wheel if the vehicle is on an
incline. If the wheel is changed on a surface
with a more severe slope, take additional
precautions to secure the vehicle from
rolling.
2. Uncover the lug bolts if necessary.
3. Loosen the lug bolts by a half turn.
Jacking up the vehicle
The vehicle jack is designed for changing
wheels only. Do not attempt to raise
another vehicle model with it or to raise any load
of any kind. To do so could cause accidents and
personal injury.<
1. Place the jack at the jacking point closest to
the wheel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Replacing components MOBILITY
231
The jack base must be perpendicular to the
surface beneath the jacking point.
2. During jacking up, insert the jack head in the
square recess of the jacking point.
3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
changing is raised off the ground.
Mounting the space-saver spare tire
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from
the mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub. Clean the lug bolts.
3. Lift the new wheel into place.
4. Screw at least two lug bolts finger-tight into
opposite bolt holes.
5. Screw in the remaining bolts.
6. Tighten all the lug bolts firmly in a diagonal
pattern.
7. Lower the vehicle.
8. Remove the jack.
Tightening the lug bolts
Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
Immediately have the wheels checked
with a calibrated torque wrench to ensure
that the lug bolts are firmly seated. Otherwise,
incorrectly tightened lug bolts can present a
safety hazard.<
Tightening torque: 103.3 lb ft or 140 Nm.
Replace the defective tire as soon as possible
and have the new wheel/tire assembly
balanced.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free; that is, the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate
climate.
Battery replacement
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manu-
facturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be
damaged and systems or functions may not
be fully available.<
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your MINI dealer to
ensure that all convenience functions are fully
available and, if necessary, the corresponding
Check Control messages are no longer dis-
played.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not connect battery chargers to the
sockets installed in the vehicle at the
factory; otherwise you may cause damage to
the battery.<
Only charge the battery in the vehicle when
the engine is off. Connections, refer to Jump-
starting on page 233.
General information
To guarantee the full service life of the battery,
ensure that the battery is always properly
charged.
It may be necessary to charge the battery in the
following situations:
> If frequent short trips are taken.
> If the vehicle is frequently parked for more
than a month.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Replacing components
232
Disposal
After replacing old batteries, return the
used batteries to your MINI dealer or to
a recycling center. Maintain the battery in an
upright position for transport and storage.
Always secure the battery against tipping over
during transport.<
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
may not be fully functional and may require
initialization. Individual settings are also lost and
must be reprogrammed:
> Time and date
These values must be updated, page 73.
> Onboard monitor
Operability must be waited for, page 118.
Indicator and warning lamps
Lights up in red:
Battery is no longer being charged.
Alternator malfunction.
Switch off all unnecessary electrical consumers.
Have the battery checked without delay.
Lights up in yellow:
Battery charge level very low, battery
aged, or battery not securely con-
nected.
Charge it by taking a longer drive or by using an
external charger. If the display appears again,
have the battery checked as soon as possible.
Fuses
Do not attempt to repair a blown fuse or
replace it with a fuse of a different color or
Ampere rating. To do this could cause a fire in
the vehicle resulting from a circuit overload.
Have fuses replaced by your MINI dealer.<
A fuse assignment diagram is located on the
inside of the fuse box cover panels.
In the engine compartment
Opening the cover
Press the latch.
In the vehicle interior
On the right side of the footwell.
Opening the cover
Press out at the recess.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance MOBILITY
233
Giving and receiving assistance
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Roadside Assistance
Roadside Assistance is available by phone
24 hours a day in many countries. You can
receive assistance there in the event of an
emergency.
First aid pouch
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore,
check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any items in good time,
if necessary.
The first aid pouch is located on the rear cargo
well by the left side trim panel.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located at the bottom of
the luggage compartment floor.
Jump-starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your MINI's engine
can be started by connecting two jumper cables
to another vehicle's battery. You can also use
the same method to help start another vehicle.
Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated
clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal
accident may occur. Carefully adhere to the
following sequence, both to prevent damage
to one or both vehicles, and to guard against
possible personal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approx-
imately the same capacitance in Ah. This
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the support vehicle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order, so that no sparks which could cause
injury occur.<
1. Open the battery cover in the engine com-
partment to access the positive terminal of
your MINI.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Giving and receiving assistance
234
2. Release the tabs on the left and right sides of
the positive terminal cover, arrows 1, and lift
the cover to open, arrow 2.
3. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or to a starting-aid terminal of the
vehicle providing assistance.
4. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started.
5. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/–
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground of
the assisting vehicle.
Body ground in MINI:
6. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
minus/– jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the battery or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the other vehicle in the
usual manner.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and
recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting, towing
away
Observe the applicable laws and regula-
tions for tow-starting and towing
vehicles.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the MINI.
It is stored in the toolkit in the cargo area under-
neath the cover on the right-hand side,
page 221.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid
lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift
the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, the tow
fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance MOBILITY
235
Access to screw thread
Push out the cover of the towing eye out of the
recess in the bumper.
Front
Rear
John Cooper Works with aerodynamic bumper:
Pull out the bottom of the cover panel of the
towing eye in the bumper, arrow.
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 58; otherwise, the low
beams, tail lamps, turn signals, and windshield
wipers may be unavailable. Do not tow the
vehicle with just the rear axle raised, as this
would allow the steering to turn.<
There is no power assist while the engine is off.
Thus, braking and steering will require increased
effort.
Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
depending on local regulations.
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Automatic transmission
Tow vehicles with automatic transmission
only with a tow truck or with the front
wheels lifted; otherwise, the transmission can be
damaged.<
Towing with a tow bar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same side
on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to
avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please
observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings,
as attachment to other vehicle parts can
lead to damage.<
Towing with a tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could
result in damage.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
MOBILITY Giving and receiving assistance
236
Towing with a tow truck
Have the MINI transported by a tow truck with a
so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body
and chassis parts, otherwise damage may
result.<
Tow-starting
Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever
possible; instead, jump-start the engine,
page 233. Vehicles with a catalytic converter
should only be tow-started when the engine is
cold, vehicles with an automatic transmission
cannot be tow-started at all.
1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply
with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, page 58.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
completely depressed and then slowly
release the clutch. After the engine starts,
immediately depress the clutch completely
again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the
tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard
warning flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance MOBILITY
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Find Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATIONS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Technical data
240
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available, for example due to the
selected options or national-market version.
This also applies to safety related functions and
systems.
Engine data
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Displacement cu in/
cmμ
97.5/
1,598
97.5/
1,598
97.5/
1,598
Number of cylinders 4 4 4
Maximum power
output
hp 121 181 208
At engine speed rpm 6,000 5,500 6,000
Maximum torque
with overboost
lb ft/
Nm
114/155
–
177/240
192/260
192/260
207/280
At engine speed
with overboost
rpm 4,250
–
1,600-5,000
1,730-4,500
1,750-5,500
2,000-5,100
Overboost briefly raises the maximum torque at high rates of acceleration, e.g. when passing.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Technical data REFERENCE
241
Dimensions
MINI Coupe
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Technical data
242
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
1
Vehicle height without roof
antenna
54.3/1,378 54.5/1,384 54.5/1,385
2
Track, front 57.4/1,459 57.2/1,453 57.2/1,453
3
Vehicle width, with outside mirror 74.5/1,892 74.5/1,892 74.5/1,892
4
Track, rear 57.8/1,467 57.5/1,461 57.5/1,461
5
Vehicle width, without outside
mirror
66.3/1,683 66.3/1,683 66.3/1,683
6
Wheelbase 97.1/2,467 97.1/2,467 97.1/2,467
7
Vehicle length 146.8/3,728 147/3,734 148/3,758
All dimensions in inches/mm. Minimum turning radius dia.: 35 ft 10 in/10.7 m.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Technical data REFERENCE
243
MINI Roadster
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Technical data
244
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
1
Vehicle height without roof
antenna
54.5/1,384 54.7/1,390 54.8/1,391
2
Track, front 57.4/1,459 57.2/1,453 57.2/1,453
3
Vehicle width, with outside mirror 74.5/1,892 74.5/1,892 74.5/1,892
4
Track, rear 57.8/1,467 57.5/1,461 57.5/1,461
5
Vehicle width, without outside
mirror
66.3/1,683 66.3/1,683 66.3/1,683
6
Wheelbase 97.1/2,467 97.1/2,467 97.1/2,467
7
Vehicle length 146.8/3,728 147/3,734 148/3,758
All dimensions in inches/mm. Minimum turning radius dia.: 35 ft 10 in/10.7 m.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Technical data REFERENCE
245
MINI Convertible
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Technical data
246
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
1
Vehicle height without roof
antenna
55.7/1,414 55.7/1,414 55.7/1,414
2
Track, front 57.4/1,459 57.2/1,453 57.2/1,453
3
Vehicle width, with outside mirror 75.3/1,913 75.3/1,913 75.3/1,913
4
Track, rear 57.8/1,467 57.5/1,461 57.5/1,461
5
Vehicle width, without outside
mirror
66.3/1,683 66.3/1,683 66.3/1,683
6
Wheelbase 97.1/2,467 97.1/2,467 97.1/2,467
7
Vehicle length 146.6/3,723 146.8/3,729 148/3,758
All dimensions in inches/mm. Minimum turning radius dia.: 35 ft 10 in/10.7 m.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Technical data REFERENCE
247
Weights
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.
MINI Coupe
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Curb weight, ready for travel, with all optional extras
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,557/1,160 2,679/1,215 2,712/1,230
> Automatic
transmission
lbs/kg 2,635/1,195 2,734/1,240 2,767/1,255
Approved gross weight
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,175/1,440 3,252/1,475 3,263/1,480
> Automatic
transmission
lbs/kg 3,252/1,475 3,307/1,500 3,318/1,505
Approved front axle load
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,786/810 1,885/855 1,896/860
> Automatic
transmission
lbs/kg 1,863/845 1,940/880 1,951/885
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,411/640 1,411/640 1,411/640
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liters
9.9/
280
9.9/
280
9.9/
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Technical data
248
MINI Roadster
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Curb weight, ready for travel, with all optional extras
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,635/1,195 2,745/1,245 2,778/1,260
> Automatic
transmission
lbs/kg 2,712/1,230 2,800/1,270 2,833/1,285
Approved gross weight
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,241/1,470 3,329/1,510 3,340/1,515
> Automatic
transmission
lbs/kg 3,318/1,505 3,373/1,530 3,395/1,540
Approved front axle load
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,786/810 1,896/860 1,907/865
> Automatic
transmission
lbs/kg 1,863/845 1,951/885 1,962/890
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,488/675 1,466/665 1,488/675
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liters
8.5/
240
8.5/
240
8.5/
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Technical data REFERENCE
249
MINI Convertible
Capacities
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Curb weight, ready for travel, with all optional extras
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,701/1,225 2,811/1,275 2,822/1,280
> Automatic
transmission
lbs/kg 2,778/1,260 2,855/1,295 2,866/1,300
Approved gross weight
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,560/1,615 3,671/1,665 3,704/1,680
> Automatic
transmission
lbs/kg 3,638/1,650 3,737/1,695 3,748/1,700
Approved front axle load
> Manual transmission
> Automatic
transmission
lbs/kg 1,863/845 1,951/885 1,973/895
lbs/kg 1,940/880 2,017/915 2,017/915
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,786/810 1,786/810 1,797/815
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liters
6.0-23.3/
170-660
6.0-23.3/
170-660
6.0-23.3/
170-660
US gal/US quarts Liters Notes
Fuel tank 13.2/– approx. 50 Fuel grade: page 197
including reserve of 2.1/– approx. 8
Window washer system incl.
headlamp washer system –/4.8 approx. 4.5 For more details: page 65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Short commands for the voice activation system
250
Short commands for the voice
activation system
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
Instructions for the voice activation system, refer
to page 21.
Having the possible spoken commands read
aloud: {Voice commands}
The following short commands apply to vehicles
with voice activation system. They do not work
for equipment with which only the mobile
phone can be operated by voice.
Useful short commands
Function Command
Accessing tone control {Tone}
Accessing settings {Settings}
Accessing the onboard computer {Onboard info}
Accessing contacts {Contacts}
To display phone book {Phonebook}
Accessing services {Assist}
Selecting destination entry {Enter address}
Selecting route guidance {Guidance}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system REFERENCE
251
CD/Multimedia
CD drive
External devices
Tone control
Function Command
Playing a CD {C D on}
Selecting a CD {Select C D}
Selecting a CD and track {C D … track …} e.g. CD 3 track 5
Selecting a track {Track …} e.g. track 5
or
{C D track …} e.g. CD track 5
Opening the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}
CD {C D}
Displaying entertainment details on the split
screen
{Entertainment details}
Function Command
Selecting external devices {External devices}
Function Command
Accessing tone control {Tone}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Short commands for the voice activation system
252
Radio
FM
AM
Satellite radio
Function Command
Selecting the radio {Radio}
Selecting FM stations {F M}
Selecting manual search {Manual}
Selecting the frequency range {Select frequency}
Selecting a station {Select station} e.g. WPLJ
Function Command
Selecting AM stations {A M}
Selecting manual search {Manual}
Function Command
Selecting the satellite radio {Satellite radio}
Switching on the satellite radio {Satellite radio on}
Selecting a satellite radio channel {Select satellite radio} e.g. channel 2
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system REFERENCE
253
Stored stations
Telephone
Contacts
Function Command
Selecting stored stations {Presets}
Choosing a stored station {Select preset}
Selecting a stored station {Preset …} e.g. stored station 2
Function Command
Opening the Telephone menu {Telephone}
To display phone book {Phonebook}
To redial {Redial}
Displaying accepted calls {Received calls}
Dialing a phone number {Dial number}
Displaying the list of messages {Messages}
Displaying Bluetooth devices {Bluetooth}
Function Command
Accessing contacts {Contacts}
My contacts {My contacts}
New contact {New contact}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Short commands for the voice activation system
254
Office
Navigation
General information
Function Command
Calling up the Office menu {Office}
Displaying Current office {Current office}
Displaying contacts {Contacts}
Displaying messages {Messages}
Displaying calendar {Calendar}
Displaying tasks {Tasks}
Displaying reminders {Reminders}
Function Command
Navigation menu {Navigation}
Selecting destination entry {Enter address}
Entering an address {Enter address}
Selecting route guidance {Guidance}
Starting route guidance {Start guidance}
Ending route guidance {Stop guidance}
Retrieving home address {Home address}
Selecting route criteria {Route preference}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system REFERENCE
255
Map
Route guidance with intermediate destinations
Selecting route {Route information}
Switching on the voice instructions {Switch on voice instructions}
Repeating a voice instruction {Repeat voice instructions}
Switching off the voice instructions {Switch off voice instructions}
Displaying the address book {Address book}
Displaying the last destinations {Last destinations}
Accessing traffic bulletins {Traffic Info}
Special destinations {Points of interest}
Function Command
Function Command
Displaying the map {Map}
Map facing north {Map facing north}
Map in the direction of travel {Map in direction of travel}
Perspective map {Map perspective view}
Automatic scaling of the map {Map with automatic scaling}
Changing the scale {Map scale}
Function Command
Entering a new destination {Enter address}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Short commands for the voice activation system
256
Vehicle information
Settings
Vehicle
Function Command
Accessing the onboard computer {Onboard info}
Accessing the trip computer {Trip computer}
Accessing vehicle information {Vehicle info}
Accessing vehicle status {Vehicle status}
Function Command
Opening the main menu {Main menu}
Accessing settings {Settings}
Accessing options {Options}
Settings on the Control Display {Control display}
Accessing time and date settings {Time and date}
Accessing language and unit settings {Language and units}
Accessing speed limit settings {Speed}
Activating lighting {Lighting}
Selecting the door lock {Door locks}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system REFERENCE
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
258
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS Antilock Brake System 79
Accepting a call 167, 178
Accessories, see Vehicle
equipment 4
Acknowledgment signals for
locking/unlocking vehicle 28
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate
control 100
Adaptive Light Control 92
Adding engine oil 213
Additives
– coolant 214
– engine oil 213
Address, entering 126
Address for navigation
– entering 120, 126
Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Air
conditioner 97
Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Automatic
climate control 98
Adjusting the tone during
audio operation, refer to
Tone control 141
Airbags 88
– sitting safely 48
– warning lamp 90
Air conditioner 96
Air conditioning mode
– air conditioner 97
– automatic climate control 98
– ventilation 100
Air distribution
– automatic 99
– individual 98
– manual 98
Air flow rate 97, 99
– air conditioning system 97
– automatic climate control 99
– heating, ventilation 97
Airing, refer to Ventilation 100
Air outlets, refer to Air vents 96
Air pressure, checking, refer to
Tire inflation pressure 199
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated-air
mode 97, 99
Air supply
– air conditioner 97
– automatic climate control 98
– ventilation 100
Air vents 96
AKI, refer to Fuel grade 197
Alarm system 32
All-season ti
res, refer to Winter
tires 209
Always Open Timer 69
AM, waveband 143
Ambient air, refer to
Recirculated-air
mode 97, 99
Ambient lighting 95
Antenna, care 217
Antifreeze
– coolant 214
– washer fluid 65
Antilock Brake System ABS 79
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 32
Anti-theft system 27
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 247
Approved engine oils 213
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 247
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 102
Arrival time
– computer 69
– route guidance 129
Ashtray 103
Assistant systems, refer to
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 79
Audio 140
– controls 140
– switching on/off 140
– tone control 141
– volume 141
Audio device, external 102
Automatic
– air distribution 99
– air flow rate 99
– cruise control 65
– headlamp control 91
Automatic climate control 96
– automatic air distribution 99
Automatic rear spoiler 81
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 60
– interlock 61
– overriding selector lever
lock 62
– shiftlock 61
– sport program 61
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 99
Auxiliary phone 175
AUX-In, refer to External audio
device 102
AUX-In connection 152
Average fuel consumption 68
– setting the units 71
Ave
rage speed 69
Avoiding highways for
navigation 129
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
259
B
Background lighting, refer to
Ambient lighting 95
Backrests, refer to Seats 49
Backup lamps
– replacing bulb 225
Band-aids, refer to First aid
pouch 233
Bar, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 235
Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone
– refer to Snap-in adapter 182
Bass sounds, refer to Tone
control 141
Battery 231
– disposal 36, 232
– jump-starting 233
– temporary power failure 232
Battery renewal
– remote control 36
Being towed 235
Belts, refer to Safety belts 51
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety
belts 51
Beverage holders, refer to
Cupholders 103
Black ice, refer to External
temperature warning 68
Blower, refer to Air flow
rate 97, 99
Bluetooth, activating/
deactivating 165, 174
Bluetooth audio 156
– device pairing 156
– disconnecting an audio
connection 158
– playback 157
– unpairing device 158
– What to do if... 158
Bottle holders, refer to
Cupholders 103
Brake Assist 79
Brake fluid, refer to Service
requirements 71
Brake lamps
– replacing bulbs 225
Brake pads, breaking in 108
Brake rotors 110
– brakes 108
– breaking in 108
Brakes
– ABS 79
– breaking in 108
– MINI Maintenance
System 215
– parking brake 60
– refer to Braking safely 109
– service requirements
71
Br
ake system 108
– breaking in 108
– disc brakes 110
– MINI Maintenance
System 215
Breakdown service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 233
Breaking in the clutch 108
Break-in period 108
Bulb changing, refer to Lamps
and bulbs 222
Button for starting the
engine 58
Buttons on the steering
wheel 11
C
Calendar 188
– displaying appointment 188
– selecting calendar day 188
California Proposition 65
warning 5
Call
– muting the microphone 180
Call ending 167, 179
Calling, refer to Phone
numbers, dialing 168, 179
Calling, refer to Telephone 102
Can holders, refer to
Cupholders 103
Capacities 249
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 231
Car care 217
Care 217
– car-care products 217
– car washes 217
– CD/DVD drives 220
– high-pressure washers 218
– leather 220
– manual washing 218
– upholstery and fabrics 219
– windows 218
– wiper blades 218
Cargo, securing 113
Cargo area 110
– capacity 247
– Comfort Access 34
– emergency operation, see
manual unlocking 31
– lamp 94
– opening from outside 31
Cargo area lamp 94
Cargo area lid, refer to
Tailgate 31
Cargo loading 112
– securing cargo 113
– stowing cargo 113
– vehicle 110
Car key, refer to Keys/remote
controls 26
Carpets, care 220
Car phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 102
– refer to
Telephone 102, 164, 173
Car radio
– refer to Radio 143
Car wash, care 217
Car washes
217
Cataly
tic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 109
CD, audio playback 150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
260
CD player 150
– controls 140
– fast forward/reverse 151
– random order 151
– selecting a track 150
– switching on/off 140
– tone control 141
– volume 141
Center armrest 102
Center brake lamp 226
Center console, refer to
Around the center
console 14
Central locking system 27
– Comfort Access 34
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Changing bulbs 222
Changing the language on the
Control Display 76
Changing the measurement
units on the Control
Display 71
Changing wheels 229
Charging the battery 231
Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 211
Check Control 74
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 55
Child restraint systems 54
Child seats 54
Chrome parts, care 219
Chrome parts, refer to
Care 217
Cigarette lighter 103
Cleaning headlamps 64
– washer fluid 65
Clock
– setting time 73
– 12 h/24 h mode 73
Closing
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Clothes hooks 103
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 59
Comfort Access 34
– replacing the battery 35
– what to observe before
entering a car wash 35
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 58
Computer 68
– displays on Control
Display 69
Cond
ensation, refer to When
the vehicle is parked 110
Condition Based Service
CBS 215
Configuring settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26
Connecting vacuum cleaner,
refer to Connecting electrical
appliances 104
Consumption, refer to Average
fuel consumption 68
Contact editing 172
Contacts 171, 185
– new contact 186
Continuing route
guidance 129
Control Display
– refer to iDrive switching on/
off 16
– refer to Onboard
computer 16
– settings 70
Controls and displays 10
Control stick, refer to Onboard
computer 16
Control unit, refer to Onboard
computer 16
Convenience operation
– windows 28
Convenient access, refer to
Comfort Access 34
Convenient start, refer to
Starting the engine 59
Convertible top 37
– manual 42
– mechanical 42
Coolant 214
– checking level 214
– filling 214
Coolant temperature 214
Cooling, maximum 99
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 214
Copyright 2
Cornering light, refer to
Adaptive Light Control 92
Criteria for route 129
Cruise control
– indicator lamp 13
Cruising range 68
Cupholders 103
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 247
Current fuel consumption 69
Current playback
– external devices 155
D
Dashboard, refer to Cockpit 10
Dashboard instruments, refer
to Displays 12
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 94
Data 240
– capacities 249
– dimensions 241
– engine 240
– weights 247
Data memory 216
Date
– setting 73
– setting format 73
Daytime running lights 92
DBC Dynamic Brake Control,
refer to Brake Assist 79
Deactivating front passenger
airbags 89
Deadlocking, refer to
Locking 28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
261
Defect
– door lock 30
– fuel filler flap 196
Defining a home address 186
Defogging windows 98, 100
Defrosting windows 98, 100
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation
– air conditioner 98
– automatic climate
control 100
Defrosting windshield, refer to
Defrosting windows 98, 100
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 98, 100
Deleting contacts 172, 187
Destination address
– entering 120, 126
Destination for navigation
– entering 120
– entering via map 125
Differential, breaking in 108
Digital radio, refer to HD
Radio 144
Dimensions 241
Dipstick, engine oil 212
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 63
Direction announcements,
refer to Voice
instructions 133
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 133
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 122
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 240
Display, refer to Onboard
computer controls 16
Displaying contact
pictures 186
Displaying contacts 171
Displaying special
destinations 125
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 94
Displays 12
– care 220
– instrument panel 12
– on the Control Display 16
Displays and controls 10
Disposal
– of coolant 214
– remote control battery 36
– vehicle battery 232
Distance remaining to service,
refer to Servic
e
requirements 71
Distance warning, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 78
Door key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 26
Door lock 29
Door lock, confirmation
signals 28
Doors, manual operation 30
DOT Quality Grades 207
Drinks holders, refer to
Cupholders 103
Drive-off assistant, refer to Hill
Assist 81
Driving dynamics control, refer
to Sport button 81
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 91
Driving notes 108
Driving off on inclines, refer to
Hill Assist 81
Driving stability control
systems 79
Driving through water 109
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 108
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 100
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 79
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 80
Dynamic Brake Control DBC,
refer to Brake Assist 79
Dynamic route guidance 135
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 79
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 80
E
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD player 140
Electrical malfunction
– convertible top 39, 45
– door lock 30
– fuel filler flap 196
– tailgate 31
Electric power windows
– initializing 36
Electronic brake-force
distribution 79
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 79
E-mail 188
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– convertible top 39, 45
– door lock 30
– fuel filler flap 196
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 62
Emergency operation, see
manual operation
– tailgate 31
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 233
Emergency unlocking 32
Ending a call 167, 179
Engine
– breaking in 108
– data 240
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 214
– speed 240
– starting, Comfort Access 34
Engine compartment 211
Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
262
Engine malfunction
– indicator lamp 13
Engine oil
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 213
– alternative oil types 213
– approved engine oils 213
– capacity 213
– checking level 212
– dipstick 212
– intervals between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 71
– MINI Maintenance
System 215
Engine oil level, checking 212
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 240
Engine starting, refer to
Starting the engine 59
Entering destination 120
Entering intersection 121
Entertainment sound output
on/off 140
Entry map for destination 125
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 79
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 109
Exterior mirrors 52
– adjusting 52
– automatic heating 53
– folding in and out 52
External audio device 102
– refer to AUX-In
connection 152
External audio device, refer to
AUX-In connection 152
External care 217
External devices
– random play sequence 155
– Software update 159
External temperature display
– change units of measure 71
– in the onboard computer 71
Eyes
– for tow-starting and towing
away 234
– for tying down loads 113
F
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 74
Failure of an electrical
consumer 232
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 51
Fastest route for
navigation 129
Fast forward
– CD player 151
Fault messages, refer to Check
Control 74
Filter
– microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 100
– microfilter for air
conditioner 98
Fine wood, care 220
First aid pouch 233
Fixture for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 58
Flash when locking/
unlocking 28
Flat tire
– run-flat tires 208
– Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 83
– indicating a flat tire 84
– initializing the system 83
– snow chains 83
– system limits 83
Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 207
Floor mats, care 220
FM, waveband 143
Fog lamps
– replacing bulb 224, 226
Folding roof, refer to
Convertible top with
integrated sliding sunroof 37
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 109
Footwell lamps 94
For your own safety 4
Front airbags 88
Front fog lamps 93
– replacing bulb 224
Front seat adjustment 49
Frost on windows, refer to
Defrosting windows 98, 100
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 83
Fuel 197
– fuel tank volume 249
– gauge 67
– high-quality brands 197
– quality 197
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 67
Fuel consumption display
–
average fuel consumption 68
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 67
Fuel filler flap 196
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 196
Fuel specifications 197
Fuses 232
G
Gasoline
– refer to Average fuel
consumption 68
– refer to Required fuel 197
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 67
Gear indicator
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61
Gear shifting
– automatic transmission 61
– manual transmission 60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
263
Gearshift lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61
– manual transmission 60
General driving notes 108
Glass roof, electric
– convenience operation 28
– remote control 28
Glove compartment 101
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 118
Grills, refer to Air vents 96
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 247
H
Halogen lamps
– replacing bulb 223
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 60
Hands-free device
Bluetooth 164
Hands-free
system 14, 170, 182
Hazard warning flashers 14
HD Radio 144
Head airbags 88
Headlamp control,
automatic 91
Headlamp flasher 63
– indicator lamp 11, 13, 97
Headlamp glass lens 222
Headlamps
– care 218
– replacing bulb 223
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Light Control 92
Head restraints 50
– sitting safely 48
Heated
– mirrors 53
– rear window 97, 100
– seats 51
Heating 96
– mirrors 53
– rear window 97, 100
– seats 51
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing
cargo 113
Height, refer to
Dimensions 241
Height adjustment
– seats 49
– steering wheel 53
High beams 93
– headlamp flasher 93
– indicator lamp 13, 97
– replacing bulb 223
High water, refer to Driving
through water 109
Highway, refer to Route
criteria 129
Hill Assist 81
Hills 109
Holders for cups 103
Homepage 4
Hood 212
Horn 10
Hot
exhaust system 109
Hydroplaning 109
I
IBOC, refer to HD Radio 144
iDrive
– status information 19
Ignition 58
– switched off 59
– switched on 58
Ignition key, refer to
Integrated key/remote
control 26
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 58
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 58
Ignition lock 58
Imprint 2
Incoming call 167, 178
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
– Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 86
Indicator lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 94
Individual air distribution 98
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 85
Information
– on another location 124
– on current position 124
– on destination location 124
Initializing
– Flat Tire Monitor FTM 83
– radio, refer to Station,
storing 144
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 133
Instrument lighting 94
Instrument panel
– refer to Cockpit 10
– refer to Displays 12
Instrument panel, refer to
Displays 12
Integrated key 26
Interactive map 125
Interesting destination for
navigation 124
Interior lamps 94
– remote control 29
Interior rearview mirror 53
– automatic dimming
feature 53
Interlock 61
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 63
Internal care 219
Internet page 4
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
264
J
Jacking points 230
Jets, refer to Window washer
nozzles 65
Joystick, refer to Onboard
computer 16
Jumpering, refer to Jump-
starting 233
Jump-starting 233
K
Key, refer to Keys/remote
controls 26
Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort
Access 34
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort Access 34
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 26
Keypad dialing 169, 180
Kickdown 61
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61
Knock control 197
L
Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/
Low beams 91
Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 222
Lashing eyes, refer to Securing
cargo 113
Last destinations 123
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 55
Leather care 220
LEDs light-emitting diodes 222
Length, refer to
Dimensions 241
License plate lamp
– bulb replacement 226
Light alloy wheels, care 219
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 222
Lighter 103
– socket 104
Lighting
– lamps and bulbs 222
– of the instruments 94
– of vehicle, refer to Lamps 91
Light switch 91
Limit, refer to Speed limit 76
Load 112
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 113
Lock buttons of doors, refer to
Locking 30
Locking
– adjusting confirmation
signal 28
– from inside 30
– from outside 28
– without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 34
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 28
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Longlife oils
– approved motor oils 213
Low beams 91
– automatic 91
– replacing bulb 223
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 49
Luggage compartment
– emergency unlocking 32
– increasing the capacity 111
– opening from the inside 31
– refer to Cargo area 31
Luggage compartment lid
– emergency operation, see
manual unlocking 31
– refer to Tailgate 31
Lumbar support 49
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 209
Main menu 17
Maintenance, refer to Service
and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Maintenance system 215
Malfunction
– convertible top 39, 45
– tailgate 31
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 74
Manual air distribution 98
Manual convertible top 42
Manually operated convertible
top 42
Manual mode
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61
Manual operation
– door lock 30
– fuel filler flap 196
– power convertible top 39, 45
– tailgate 31
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 62
Manual transmission 60
Manual washing 218
Map
– changing scale 132
Map for navigation
– entering destination 125
Master key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 26
Maximum cooling 99
Maximum speed
– with winter tires 210
Medical assistance, refer to
First aid pouch 233
MENU button 16
Menus, refer to Onboard
computer 16
Messages 187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
265
Microfilter
– for air conditioner 98
– for automatic climate
control 100
– MINI Maintenance
System 215
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter
– MINI Maintenance
System 215
Microphone for telephone 14
MINI Connected 192
MINI Internet page 4
MINI joystick, refer to Onboard
computer 16
MINI Maintenance System 215
Mirror dimming feature 53
Mirrors 52
– exterior mirrors 52
– heating 53
– interior rearview mirror 53
Mobile phone
– adjusting volume 167, 178
– connecting, refer to Mobile
phone, pairing 164, 174
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 102
– pairing 164, 174
– refer to Telephone 102
– What to do if…. 166, 177
Mobile phone preparation
Bluetooth 173
Mobility Kit 227
Modifications, technical, refer
to For your own safety 4
Monitor, refer to MINI controls
with navigation 16
Monitoring system for tire
pressures, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 83
Multifunctional steering
wheel, refer to Buttons on
the steering wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 63
– refer to Wiper system 63
N
Navigation
– storing current position 122
Navigation data 118
Navigation destination
– entering manually 120, 126
– home address 123
Navigation instructions, refer
to Switching voice
instructions on/off 133
Navigation system 118
– address book 122
– bypassing a route
section 130
– continuing route
guidance 129
– destination entry 120
– dynamic route guidance 135
– entering a destination
manually 120, 126
– planning a trip 127
– route list 130
– selecting destination via
map 125
– selecting route criteria 129
– special destinations 124
– starting route guidance 129
– terminating route
guidance 129
– voice instructions 133
– volume adjustment 133
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 50
Nets, refer to Storage
compartments 102
New tires 209
North-facing map 131
Notes 189
Number of cylinders, refer to
Engine data 240
Number of safety belts 48
Nylon rope, refer to Tow
rope 235
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket for
On-Board Diagnosis 216
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 197
Odometer 68
Office 184
– current office 184
– What to do if…. 190
Oil, refer to Engine oil 212
Oil consumption 212
Oil level 212
Oil types 213
Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 232
Onboard computer 16
– adjusting brightness 77
– changing language 76
– menu guidance 17
– operating principles 16
– overview 16
Opening and closing
– Comfort Access 34
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
– using the door lock 29
– using the remote control 27
Opening and unlocking
– from inside 30
Options, selecting for
navigation 129
Orientation menu, refer to
Main menu 17
Outlets
– refer to Air vents 96
– refer to Ventilation 100
Output, refer to Engine
data 240
Outside-air mode
– automatic climate control 99
Overheated engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
266
P
Paintwork, care 219
Park Distance Control PDC 78
Parking
– vehicle 59
Parking aid, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 78
Parking brake 60
– indicator lamp 13
Parking lamps, replacing
bulb 224
Parking lamps/low beams 91
Parts and accessories, see
Vehicle equipment 4
Pathway lighting 92
Personal Profile 26
Phone numbers
– dialing 168, 179
Plastic parts, care 220
Pollen
– refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 100
– refer to Microfilter for air
conditioner 98
Power convertible top 37
Power failure 232
Power windows 36
Power windows, refer to
Windows 36
Pressure, tires 199
Pressure monitoring, tires 83
– Flat Tire Monitor 83
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 85
Puncture
– Flat Tire Monitor 83
R
Radio
– controls 140
– HD Radio 144
– satellite radio 145
– select waveband 143
– storing stations 144
– tone control 141
– volume 141
Radio key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 26
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 58
Radio readiness 58
– switched off 59
– switched on 58
Rain sensor 64
Random play sequence
– external devices 155
Range, refer to Cruising
range 68
Reading aloud 190
Reading lamps 94
Rear fog lamp 94
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulb 226
Rear lamps
– bulb replacement 225
– refer to Tail lamps 225
Rear-mounted luggage
rack 114
Rear spoiler, refer to
Automatic rear spoiler 81
Rearview mirror, refer to
Mirrors 52
Rear window defroster 97, 100
Reception
– quality 144
– radio station 144
Recirculated-air mode 97, 99
Recirculation of air, refer to
Recirculated-air
mode 97, 99
Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest 49
Refueling 196
Rejecting a call 167, 178
Releasing
– hood 212
Reminders 189
Remote control 26
– battery renewal 35
– Comfort Access 34
– malfunctions 29
, 35
– s
ervice data 215
– tailgate 29
Replacement remote
control 26
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 222
Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 209
Reporting safety defects 7
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 67
Reservoir for washer
systems 65
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 142
Restraint systems
– for children 54
– refer to Safety belts 51
Reverse
– CD player 151
Reverse gear
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61
– manual transmission 60
Road map 131
Roadside Assistance 233
Roadside parking lamps 93
– replacing bulb 224
Road worthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 71
Roof load capacity 247
Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
267
Route 129, 130
– bypassing sections 130
– changing 129, 130
– changing criteria 129
– displaying arrow view 130
– displaying map view 131
– displaying streets or towns/
cities 130
– selecting 129
Route guidance 129
– bypassing a route
section 130
– changing specified route 129
– distance and arrival 129
– voice instructions 133
– volume of voice
instructions 133
Route section, changing 130
Route selection 129
RSC Run-flat System
Component, refer to Run-flat
tires 208
Rubber parts, care 219
Run-flat System Component
RSC, refer to Run-flat
tires 208
Run-flat tires 208
– flat tire 84
– tire inflation pressure 199
– tire replacement 209
– winter tires 209
S
Safety belt
– number 48
Safety Belt Reminder 52
Safety belts 51
– care 220
– damage 52
– indicator lamp 52
– reminder 52
– sitting safely 48
Safety systems
– airbags 88
– Antilock Brake System
ABS 79
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 79
– safety belts 51
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 208
Satellite radio 145
– channel, activating or
deactivating 146
– channel, selecting 146
– channel, storing 147
– favorites 148
– time shift 147
– Traffic Jump 149
Screen, refer to Onboard
computer controls 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 235
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 145
Seat adjustment
– mechanical 49
Seats 49
– adjusting the seats 49
– heating 51
– sitting safely 48
Securing the vehicle
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Selecting navigation
system 118
Selecting new scale for
navigation 132
Selector lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61
Selector lever lock
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic, refer to
Shiftlock 61
– overriding manually 62
Selector lever positions
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 233
Service car, refer to Roadside
Assistance 233
Service data in the remote
control 215
Service Interval Display, refer
to Condition Based
Service
CBS 215
Service requirement display,
refer to Condition Based
Service CBS 215
Service requirements 71
Settings
– clock, 12 h/24 h mode 73
– date format 73
Setting time and date 73
Setting time zone, time, and
date 73
Shifting gears
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61
– manual transmission 60
Shiftlock
– automatic transmission, refer
to Changing selector lever
positions 61
Short commands for the voice
activation system 250
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 129
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD player 151
Side airbags 88
Side turn signal
– replacing bulb 225
Side windows, refer to
Windows 36
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sitting safely 48
– airbags 48
– safety belts 48
– with head restraint 48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
268
Size, refer to Dimensions 241
Slipstream deflector, refer to
Wind deflector 41, 46
Slot for remote control 58
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 103
Snap-in adapter
– inserting/removing 182
– refer to Center armrest
storage compartment 102
– use 173
Snow chains 210
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 104
Socket for On-Board Diagnosis
OBD 216
Software update 159
Space-saver spare tire
– changing tires 229
– inflation pressure 199
Spare wheel, refer to Space-
saver spare tire 229
Speaking, refer to Voice
instructions from navigation
system 133
Special destinations 124
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 213
Speed 240
– with winter tires 210
Speed limit 76
– setting 76
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 76
Speedo, refer to
Speedometer 12
Speedometer 12
Speed volume 141
Split-folding rear seats 112
Split rear backrest, refer to
Split-folding rear seats 112
Sport button 81
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 79
Start/Stop button 58
– starting the engine 59
– switching off the engine 59
Starting, refer to Starting the
engine 59
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump-starting 233
Starting route guidance 129
Starting the engine 59
– Start/Stop button 58
Start-off assistance, refer to
– DSC 79
– Hill Assist 81
State/province, for
navigation 120
Station, selecting
– radio 143
Sta
tus information on the
Control Display 19
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 4
Steering wheel 53
– adjustment 53
– buttons on steering wheel 11
– lock 58
– shift paddles 62
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 60
Storage area
– cargo area 110
Storage compartment, front
passenger side 102
Storage compartments 102
Storage space
– refer to Luggage
compartment in the MINI
Convertible 111
– storage compartments 102
Storing a destination in the
address book 122
Storing the vehicle 220
Storing tires 210
Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 102
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 199
SW, waveband 143
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off
– engine 59
Switching off the engine 59
– Start/Stop button 58
Switching on
– audio 140
– CD player 140
– radio 140
Switching radio on/off 140
Switching the cooling function
on and off 100
Symbols 4
– status information 19
T
Tachometer 67
Tailgate 31
– Comfort Access 34
– emergency operation 32
– emergency unlocking 32
– manually releasing 31
– opening/closing 31
– opening from outside 31
– unlocking with remote
control 29
Tail lamp, refer to Tail
lamps 225
– replacing bulb 225
Tail lamps 225
Tank volume, refer to
Capacities 249
Target cursor for
navigation 125
Tasks 189
Technical data 240
Technical modifications 4
Telephone
– hands-free system 170, 182
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
269
Telephone receiving power,
refer to Status
information 19
Temperature display
– setting the units 71
Temperature of coolant, refer
to Coolant temperature 214
Temperature setting
– air conditioner 97
– automatic climate control 99
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 65
Tensioning straps, refer to
Securing cargo 113
Text message 187
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 226
Three-point safety belt 51
Tightening the lug bolts
– keys 221
– torque 231
Tightening torque, refer to
Tightening lug bolts 231
Tire change set
– space-saver spare tire 221
Tire failure
– Flat Tire Monitor 84
– indicator/warning lamp 84
– MINI Mobility Kit 227
– run-flat tires 84
– space-saver spare tire 229
– Tire Pressure Monitor 85
Tire inflation pressure 199
– loss 84, 85
– space-saver spare tire 199
Tire pressure monitoring, refer
to Flat Tire Monitor 83
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85
– limitations of system 85
– resetting system 86
– warning lamp 86
Tire Quality Grading 206
Tires
– age 208
– breaking in 108
– changing, refer to Changing
wheels 229
– condition 207
– damage 207, 208
– inflation pressure 199
– inflation pressure loss 86
– minimum tread depth 207
– new tires 209
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 83
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 85
– puncture 84
– s
ize 206
– wear indicators, refer to
Minimum tread depth 208
– winter tires 209
– with emergency operation
properties 208
Tires with emergency
operation properties, refer to
Run-flat tires 208
Tires with safety features, refer
to Run-flat tires 208
TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 133
Tone
– middle setting 142
Tone during audio playback
– adjusting 141
Toolkit 221
Tools, refer to Toolkit 221
Torque 240
– lug bolts 231
Tow bar 235
Tow fitting 234
– screw thread 235
Tow fittings for tow-starting
and towing away 234
Towing 234
– car with automatic
transmission 235
– methods 235
Tow rope 235
Tow-starting 234
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 85
Track
– selecting on CD 150
Track width, refer to
Dimension 241
Traction control, refer to
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 79
Traffic bulletins
– categories 135
– filtering 135
Traffic congestion
– displaying traffic
information 133
– refer to Route, bypassing
segments 130
Traffic information for
navigation
– displaying 134
Traffic information in
navigation
– screen display in the map
view 134
Trailer operation
– trailer loads and gross vehicle
weight 247
Transmission
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 60
– manual transmission 60
– overriding selector lever lock
for automatic transmission
with
Steptronic 62
Transporting children safely 54
Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo 113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
270
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 207
Treble, refer to Tone
control 141
Trip computer 69
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 68
Triple turn signal activation 63
Trip odometer 68
Trunk, refer to Luggage
compartment in the MINI
Convertible 111
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 241
Turn signal 63
– front, replacing bulb 224
– indicator lamp 12, 13
– rear, replacing bulb 225
– side, replacing bulb 225
Tying down loads, refer to
Cargo loading 113
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
UTQR 206
Units
– average fuel consumption 71
– temperature 71
Unlatching, refer to
Unlocking 34
Unlocking
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
– tailgate 34
– without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 34
Updating the navigation
data 118
Upholstery, care 219
USB audio interface 153
USB interface 101
Using contact data 190
V
Valve
– dust cap 230
Vehicle
– battery 231
– breaking in 108
– cargo loading 110
– dimensions 241
– identification number, refer
to Engine compartment 211
– parking 59
– storage 220
– weight 247
Vehicle equipment 4
Vehicle jack 221
– jacking points 230
Ventilation
– air conditioner 100
Vents, refer to Air vents 96
Vents, refer to Ventilation 100
Voice commands
– overview 21
– short commands 250
Voice instructions for
navigation system 133
– repeating 133
– switching on/off 133
– volume 133
Volume 140
– audio sources 140
– mobile phone 167, 178
– voice instructions 133
Volume balance, tone
setting 141
Volume of cargo area 247
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 74
Warning triangle 233
Washer fluid 65
– capacity of reservoir 65
Washer fluid reservoir 65
Waste tray, refer to
Ashtray 103
Waterfall lighting, refer to
Ambient lighting 95
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 109
Waveband for radio 143
Wear indicators in tires, refer to
Minimum tread depth 208
Weights 247
Welcome lamps 92
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 241
Wheels, new 209
Wheels and tires 199
Wheel stud wrench
– space-saver spare tire 221
Width, refer to Dimensions 241
Wind deflector 41, 46
Windows 36
– closing 36
– convenience operation 28
– opening 36
Windows, indicator on Control
Display 16
Window washer, refer to
Washer fluid 65
Window washer reservoir,
refer to Washer fluid
– volume, refer to
Capacities 249
Window washer system 63
– washer fluid 65
– washer jets 65
Windshield
– cleaning 64
– defrosting and removing
condensation 98, 100
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 221
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
271
Winter tires 209
– setting speed limit 76
– storage 210
Wiper blade replacement 221
Wiper system 63
Word matching principle for
navigation 127
Work in the engine
compartment 212
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Toolkit 221
X
Xenon lamps
– replacing bulb 223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
01 40 2 914 807 ue
*BL291480700D*
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 807 - © 07/12 BMW AG
